Yamaha Stereo Receiver HTR 6060 User Manual

U
HTR-6060  
AV Receiver  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important safety instructions  
d) If the product does not operate normally by following  
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls  
that are covered by the operating instructions as an  
improper adjustment of other controls may result in  
damage and will often require extensive work by a  
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal  
operation,  
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or  
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna  
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some  
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.  
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,  
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the  
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire  
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,  
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding  
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.  
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any  
way, and  
f)  
When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-  
mance - this indicates a need for service.  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING  
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,  
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer or have the same  
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized  
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other  
hazards.  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
WIRE  
MAST  
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to  
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety  
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating  
condition.  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810–20)  
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted  
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat  
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810–21)  
GROUND CLAMPS  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250. PART H)  
Note to CATV system installer:  
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system  
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that  
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in  
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be  
connected to the grounding system of the building, as  
close to the point of cable entry as practical.  
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)  
1
IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS  
UNIT!  
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that  
interference will not occur in all installations. If this  
product is found to be the source of interference, which  
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,  
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the  
following measures:  
This product, when installed as indicated in the  
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC  
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by  
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to  
use the product.  
IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to  
accessories and/or another product use only high quality  
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST  
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to  
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to  
use this product in the USA.  
NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply  
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15  
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these  
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that  
your use of this product in a residential environment will  
not result in harmful interference with other electronic  
devices.  
Relocate either this product or the device that is being  
affected by the interference.  
2
3
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit  
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.  
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient  
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,  
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.  
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory  
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to  
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the  
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics  
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA  
90620.  
The above statements apply ONLY to those products  
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its  
subsidiaries.  
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if  
not installed and used according to the instructions found  
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the  
operation of other electronic devices.  
Caution-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.  
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.  
1
2
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual  
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.  
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean  
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,  
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least  
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on  
the back of this unit.  
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time  
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall  
outlet.  
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power  
plug can be reached easily.  
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on  
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is  
faulty.  
3
4
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,  
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.  
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit  
in the standby mode, and then disconnect the AC power plug  
from the AC wall outlet.  
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from  
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with  
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent  
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical  
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.  
Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto  
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or  
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:  
19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as  
sunshine, fire or like.  
WARNING  
5
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN  
OR MOISTURE.  
Other components, as they may cause damage and/or  
discoloration on the surface of this unit.  
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,  
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.  
Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid  
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to  
this unit.  
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power  
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,  
even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON.  
This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this  
unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of  
power.  
6
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,  
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature  
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,  
and/or personal injury.  
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS  
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to  
wide slot and fully insert.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
7
8
9
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections  
are complete.  
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,  
possibly causing damage.  
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.  
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,  
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.  
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS  
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la  
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de  
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à  
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might  
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.  
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this  
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may  
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha  
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use  
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.  
IMPORTANT  
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space  
below.  
MODEL:  
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and  
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit  
during a lightning storm.  
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified  
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The  
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.  
Serial No.:  
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.  
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future  
reference.  
Caution-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
INTRODUCTION  
ADVANCED OPERATION  
Notice ....................................................................... 2  
PREPARATION  
Optimizing the speaker setting  
BASIC OPERATION  
Displaying the current status of this unit  
Playing video sources  
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION  
APPENDIX  
Enjoying unprocessed input sources  
(at the end of this manual)  
Front panel................................................................i  
Remote control ....................................................... ii  
List of remote control codes ................................. iii  
Enjoying multi-channel sources  
A
1SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the  
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.  
Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this  
manual for the information about each position of the parts.  
1 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTICE  
Notice  
About this manual  
y indicates a tip for your operation.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Some operations can be performed by using either the  
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote  
control. In case the button names differ between the front  
panel and the remote control, the button name on the  
remote control is given in parentheses.  
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and  
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of  
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the  
manual and product, the product has priority.  
DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6”  
are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
“96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.  
A
• “1SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the  
TM  
iPod  
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.  
Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this  
manual for the information about each position of the  
parts.  
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
• The symbol “” with page number(s) indicates the  
corresponding reference page(s).  
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC.  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the  
most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe  
level. One that lets the sound come through loud and  
clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and,  
most importantly, without affecting your sensitive  
hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often  
undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic  
Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group  
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive  
volume levels.  
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA  
CORPORATION.  
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM  
Satellite Radio Inc.  
Neural Surroundname and related logos are trademarks owned  
by Neural Audio Corporation.  
2 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Features  
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier  
XM Satellite Radio  
Minimum RMS output power  
(1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 )  
Front: 105 W + 105 W  
XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Mini-  
Tuner Dock” sold separately)  
Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of  
XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in  
a full surround sound experience  
Center: 105 W  
Surround: 105 W + 105 W  
Surround back: 105 W + 105 W  
XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability  
SCENE function  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
18 preset SCENE templates for various situations  
4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability  
Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support  
component (some models only) working with the SCENE  
function  
HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition  
video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as  
multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a  
iPod controlling capability  
DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock  
(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod  
(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini  
Playback information displaying capability  
Battery charging capability  
Sound field programs  
Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound  
fields  
Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound  
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to  
that of a high-quality stereo  
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder  
DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6,  
DTS 96/24 decoder  
Other features  
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for  
automatic speaker setup  
192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter  
OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize  
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system  
5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-  
channel input  
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
decoder  
Neural Surround decoder  
Virtual CINEMA DSP  
SILENT CINEMA  
S-video signal input/output capability  
Component video input/output capability includes  
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)  
Digital video signal conversion (composite video S-video  
component video) capability for monitor out  
Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks  
Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources  
Cinema and music night listening modes  
Remote control with preset remote control codes capability  
Bi-amplification connection capability  
Sophisticated FM/AM tuner  
40-station random and direct preset tuning  
Automatic preset tuning  
Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)  
Sleep timer  
Supplied accessories  
Check that you received all of the following parts.  
Batteries (2)  
(AA, R6, UM-3)  
Remote control  
AM loop antenna  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
MD  
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL  
CD  
CD-R  
CBL  
DTV  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
DOCK  
V-AUX  
DVR  
PHONO  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV VOL  
TV MUTE  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV  
TV INPUT  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
5
6
7
8
SUR. DECODE  
9
NIGHT  
0
SLEEP  
ENT  
+10  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
Optimizer microphone  
SRCH MODE  
Indoor FM antenna  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
Note  
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.  
3 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GETTING STARTED  
Getting started  
Installing batteries in the remote control  
1
3
2
1
2
Take off the battery compartment cover.  
Insert the two supplied batteries  
(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity  
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the  
battery compartment.  
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back  
into place.  
Notes  
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following  
conditions:  
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.  
V
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light  
becomes dim.  
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.  
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and  
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as  
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and  
color.  
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid  
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with  
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before  
installing new batteries.  
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose  
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.  
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2  
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,  
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory  
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code  
and program any acquired functions that may have been  
cleared.  
4 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
Quick start guide  
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.  
Front right  
speaker  
Preparation: Check the items  
In these steps, you need the following supplied  
accessories.  
Video monitor  
Subwoofer  
Front left  
speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
AM loop antenna  
Indoor FM antenna  
The following items are not included in the package of this  
unit.  
Center  
speaker  
Surroundback  
right speaker  
DVD player  
Speakers  
Surround back left  
speaker  
Front speakers .................................... 2  
Center speaker ................................... 1  
Surround speakers ............................. 4  
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The  
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.  
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is  
as follows:  
Surround left  
speaker  
1. Two surround speakers  
2. Center speaker  
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)  
Active subwoofer .................................... 1  
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA  
input jack.  
Speaker cables ........................................ 7  
Subwoofer cable ..................................... 1  
Select a monaural RCA cable.  
DVD player ............................................... 1  
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital  
audio output jack and composite video output  
jack.  
Video monitor........................................... 1  
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector  
equipped with a composite video input jack.  
Video cable .............................................. 1  
Select an RCA composite video cable.  
Digital coaxial audio cable ..................... 1  
Enjoy DVD playback!  
5 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
Step 1: Set up your speakers  
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this  
unit.  
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel  
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.  
Front speakers and center speaker  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
VIDEO  
CENTER  
CENTER  
VIDEO  
L
L
L
GND  
S
VIDEO  
R
R
R
IN  
OUT  
IN  
VCR  
OUT  
IN  
REC  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MD/  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT(6CH)  
SB(8CH)  
SUB  
SUB  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
DVR  
PHONO  
XM  
CD  
(PLAY)CD-R (OUT)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SURROUND  
HDMI  
WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
WOOFER  
DOCK  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
B
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
P
P
R
PB  
Y
PR  
B
Y
Loosen  
Insert  
Tighten  
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL INPUT  
CD  
5
DVD  
6
1
2
DVD IN1  
DTV/CBL IN2  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
AC OUTLETS  
DVR  
FRONT B/PRESENCE  
EXTRA SP  
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
AM  
GND  
FM  
75  
UNBAL  
REMOTE  
OUT  
PRESENCE  
SINGLE  
1
2
Place your speakers and subwoofer in the  
room.  
Connect speaker cables to each speaker.  
Center speaker  
To the front right  
speaker  
To the front left  
speaker  
Surround and surround back speakers  
Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.  
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a  
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)  
cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.  
Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.  
3
Connect each speaker cable to the  
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.  
To the surround  
right speaker  
To the  
1
2
3
4
surround back  
left speaker  
To the surround  
back right speaker  
To the surround  
left speaker  
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are  
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.  
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables  
together to prevent short circuits.  
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.  
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal  
part of this unit.  
5
Connect the subwoofer cable to the  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and  
the input jack of the subwoofer.  
Subwoofer  
AV receiver  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT jack  
Input jack  
Subwoofer cable  
6 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
Step 2: Connect your DVD player  
and other components  
2
Connect the video cable to the composite  
video output jack of your DVD player and  
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
VIDEO  
CENTER  
CENTER  
VIDEO  
L
L
L
GND  
S
VIDEO  
R
R
R
IN  
OUT  
IN  
VCR  
OUT  
IN  
REC  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MD/  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT(6CH)  
SB(8CH)  
SUB  
SUB  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
DVR  
PHONO  
XM  
CD  
(PLAY)CD-R (OUT)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
VCR  
SURROUND  
HDMI  
WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
WOOFER  
DOCK  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
B
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
P
P
R
PB  
Y
PR  
B
Y
DVD player  
AV receiver  
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL INPUT  
CD  
5
DVD  
1
2
6
DVD IN1  
DTV/CBL IN2  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
AC OUTLETS  
DVR  
FRONT B/PRESENCE  
EXTRA SP  
FRONT  
A
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
AM  
GND  
FM  
75  
UNBAL  
REMOTE  
OUT  
PRESENCE  
SINGLE  
DVD VIDEO jack  
Composite video  
Video cable  
Make sure that this unit and the DVD  
player are unplugged from the AC  
wall outlets.  
output jack  
3
Connect the video cable to the VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video  
input jack of your video monitor.  
1
Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the  
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD  
player and the DVD COAXIAL jack of this  
unit.  
Video monitor  
AV receiver  
DVD player  
AV receiver  
Video  
input jack  
Digital coaxial  
audio output  
jack  
Video cable  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack  
DVD DIGITAL INPUT  
coaxial jack  
Digital coaxial audio  
cable  
7 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
For further connections  
4
Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and  
indoor FM antenna to this unit.  
See page 24 for the connection information.  
Using the other kind of speaker  
combinations  
Connecting a video monitor via various  
ways of the connection  
AM loop antenna  
Connecting a DVD player via various ways  
of the connection  
Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital  
video recorder  
Connecting a set-top box  
Indoor FM antenna  
Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or  
a turntable  
Insert  
Open the lever  
Close the lever  
Connecting an external amplifier  
Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-  
channel audio connection  
y
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock  
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and  
you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal  
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna  
Using the REMOTE OUT jacks  
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front  
panel  
Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna  
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock  
5
Connect the power plug of this unit and other  
components into the AC wall outlet.  
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLETS for the power supply of  
the other components. See page 24 for details.  
Note  
The type of the power plug is different depending on the models.  
8 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick start guide  
Step 3: Turn on the power and  
press SCENE 1 button  
0
Rotate VOLUME to adjust the volume.  
4
Check the type of the connected speakers.  
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to  
“6MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm  
speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see  
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
E
2
Press SCENE1 button.  
Note  
“DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display,  
and this unit automatically optimize own status for  
the DVD playback.  
When you change the input source or sound field program,  
the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the  
selected SCENE button turns off.  
Using the other SCENE buttons  
In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding  
SCENE button to enjoy the playback of the desired  
sources.  
Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the  
connected DVD player as the background  
music for this room...”  
E
Press SCENE2 (or  
F
SCENE2) to select “Disc  
Listening”.  
Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...”  
E
Press SCENE3 (or  
y
F
SCENE3) to select “TV  
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while  
this unit is in the SCENE mode.  
Viewing”.  
Case C: “I want to listen to a music program of the  
3
Start playback of the desired DVD on your  
player.  
FM/AM radio station...”  
E
Press SCENE4 (or  
y
F
SCENE4) to select “Radio  
If the connected DVD player is a Yamaha product and has  
capability of the SCENE control signals with the REMOTE  
OUT jack of this unit (see page 23), this unit can  
automatically activate the DVD player and start playback  
Listening”.  
E
when you press the SCENE1 button. Refer to the  
instruction manual of the DVD player for further  
information.  
9 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Quick start guide  
Notes  
What do you want to do with this  
unit?  
• To use the “TV Viewing” template (Case B), you must connect  
a satellite receiver, a cable TV receiver or an HDTV decoder to  
this unit in advance. See page 20 for details.  
Customizing the SCENE templates  
• To use the “Radio Listening” template (Case C), you have to  
tune into the desired radio station. See pages 50 to 52 for the  
tuning information.  
• To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM  
loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM  
antenna.  
Using various SCENE templates  
Creating your original SCENE templates  
y
If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change  
the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See  
page 33 for details.  
Using various input sources  
Basic controls of this unit  
After using this unit...  
Enjoying FM/AM radio programs  
A
Press STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the  
standby mode.  
Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs  
Using your iPod with this unit.  
Using various sound features  
Using various sound field programs  
Using the pure direct mode for high fidelity  
sound  
Customizing the sound field programs  
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small  
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from  
the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby  
Adjusting the parameters of this unit  
Automatically optimizing the speaker  
parameters for your listening room  
(AUTO SETUP)  
E
mode, press the desired SCENE buttons (or  
F
H
A
SCENE) or STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or  
POWER on the remote control). See page 25 for  
details.  
Manually adjusting various parameters of  
this unit manually  
Setting the remote control  
Adjusting the advanced parameters  
Additional features  
Automatically turning off this unit  
10 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
Connections  
Rear panel  
XM jack  
(U.S.A. and Canada  
models only  
AUDIO jacks  
Video jacks  
Connect the analog audio  
cable plugs.  
Connect the video cable  
plugs.  
Connect the XM Mini-  
Tuner Dock (sold  
separately).  
DOCK terminal  
MULTI CH INPUT jacks  
PRE OUT jacks  
Connect a Yamaha iPod  
universal dock  
Connect the input source  
component equipped with the  
multi-channel output jacks.  
Connect external amplifiers and an  
active subwoofer.  
(sold separately).  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
VIDEO  
CENTER  
CENTER  
VIDEO  
L
L
L
GND  
S VIDEO  
R
R
R
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
MONITOR  
MD/  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
FRONT(6CH)  
SB(8CH)  
SUB  
SUB  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
A
DVR  
VCR  
OUT  
PHONO  
XM  
CD  
(PLAY)CD-R (REC)  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
SURROUND  
HDMI  
WOOFER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
WOOFER  
DOCK  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
B
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
P
R
PB  
Y
P
R
PB  
Y
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
DVD  
3
DTV/CBL  
4
CD  
5
DVD  
6
1
2
DVD IN1  
DTV/CBL IN2  
OUT  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL INPUT  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
C
MONITOR OUT  
AC OUTLETS  
DVR  
FRONT  
A
FRONT B/PRESENCE  
EXTRA SP  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
AM  
GND  
FM  
75  
UNBAL  
REMOTE  
OUT  
PRESENCE  
SINGLE  
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT  
jacks  
Speaker terminals  
Connect the speakers.  
Connect the digital audio  
cable plugs.  
P. 19-21  
HDMI connectors  
AC OUTLETS  
Connect the HDMI components.  
ANTENNA terminals  
Connect the FM and AM  
antenna.  
ANTENNA  
AM  
GND  
FM  
75  
UNBAL  
REMOTE  
OUT  
REMOTE OUT jack  
Connect the remote control  
input jack of the Yamaha  
components.  
11 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
.
Placing speakers  
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-  
channel audio sources.  
PL  
PR  
C
FL  
FR  
PR  
FR  
SL  
PL  
SW  
30˚  
SR  
SBR  
FL  
C
SBL  
SL  
SL  
SR  
SR  
60˚  
80˚  
SBL  
SBR  
1.8 m (6 ft)  
30 cm (12 in) or more  
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)  
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the  
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.  
Center speaker (C)  
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a  
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.  
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)  
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.  
Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR)  
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.  
Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)  
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field  
programs (see page 42). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “EXTRA  
SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 and 72).  
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)  
PL  
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)  
PR  
1.8 m (6 ft)  
1.8 m (6 ft)  
FL  
FR  
C
Subwoofer (SW)  
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is  
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction  
of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is  
not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front  
speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.  
12 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Connecting speakers  
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,  
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.  
Caution  
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 25).  
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage  
this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front  
panel display when you turn on this unit.  
Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the  
speakers away from the monitor.  
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm  
speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 90).  
Note  
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,  
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable  
to the “–” (black) terminals.  
EXTRA SP terminals  
Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B) or presence speakers. To  
select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72).  
Subwoofer  
y
You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP  
terminals in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 29).  
PRE OUT  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SPEAKERS  
CENTER  
FRONT  
A
FRONT B/PRESENCE  
EXTRA SP  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
PRESENCE  
SINGLE  
Center speaker  
Right  
Left  
Surround speakers  
Left  
Right  
Surround back speakers  
When you use single surround back speaker, connect the  
speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal  
(SINGLE).  
Right  
Left  
Front speakers  
(FRONT A)  
13 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Connecting the speaker cable  
Connecting the banana plug  
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of  
insulation from the end of each speaker  
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the  
cable together to prevent short circuits.  
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana  
plug connector into the end of the  
corresponding terminal.  
10 mm (0.4 in)  
Red: positive (+)  
Black: negative (–)  
2
Loosen the knob.  
Using bi-amplification connections  
Caution  
Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the  
LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)  
crossovers.  
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections  
to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-  
amplification.  
Red: positive (+)  
Black: negative (–)  
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT  
and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To  
activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”  
to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 92).  
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side  
of each terminal.  
Front speakers  
Left  
Right  
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.  
FRONT  
A
SURROUND BACK/  
BI-AMP  
R
L
R
SINGLE L  
This unit  
Note  
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the  
shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the  
instruction manuals of the speakers for details.  
14 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Information on jacks and cable plugs  
Audio jacks and cable plugs  
Video jacks and cable plugs  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
Y
PB  
PR  
L
R
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
(White)  
(Red)  
(Orange)  
(Yellow)  
(Green) (Blue) (Red)  
S
O
V
PB  
PR  
Y
L
R
C
Left and right  
analog audio  
cable plugs  
Coaxial  
digital audio  
cable plug  
Optical  
digital  
audio cable  
plug  
Composite  
video cable  
plug  
S-video  
cable plug  
Component  
video cable  
plugs  
Audio jacks  
Video jacks  
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection  
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other  
components.  
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection  
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video  
monitor.  
AUDIO jacks  
VIDEO jacks  
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left  
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the  
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.  
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via  
composite video cables.  
S VIDEO jacks  
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks  
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital  
audio cables.  
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and  
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate  
wires of S-video cables.  
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks  
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital  
audio cables.  
For component video signals, separated into the  
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals  
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.  
Notes  
y
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and  
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the  
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals  
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are  
compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling  
frequency.  
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See  
pages 17 and 81 for details.  
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the  
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not  
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This  
cap protects the jack from dust.  
15 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Connections  
Information on HDMI™  
HDMI compatibility with this unit  
HDMI jack and cable plug  
Compatible  
HDMI  
components  
Audio signal  
types  
Audio signal  
formats  
HDMI  
HDMI cable plug  
2ch Linear PCM  
2ch, 32-192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bit  
CD, DVD-Video,  
DVD-Audio, etc.  
Multi-ch Linear  
PCM  
8ch, 32-192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bit  
DVD-Audio, etc.  
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16  
feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.  
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack DVI-D jack) to connect  
this unit to other DVI components.  
DSD  
2/5.1ch, 2.8224  
MHz, 1 bit  
SACD, etc.  
Bitstream  
Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.  
Notes  
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following  
standards:  
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of  
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of  
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt  
playback or cause noise.  
• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or  
HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the  
HDMI OUT jack.  
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the  
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to  
establish the connection to the component.  
HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by  
HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed  
by Digital Content Protection, LLC.  
Notes  
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video  
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of  
the DVD player.  
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or  
DVI components.  
You can check the potential problem about the HDMI  
connection (see page 41).  
16 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Audio and video signal flow  
Audio signal flow  
Video signal flow  
Input  
Output  
Input  
Output  
HDMI  
HDMI  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
(COAXIAL)  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
(OPTICAL)  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
Digital output  
Analog output  
Through  
Video conversion ON (see page 81)  
Notes  
Notes  
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and  
DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be  
output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO”  
is set to “OTHER” (see page 77).  
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT  
VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the  
input signals is as follows:  
1. COMPONENT VIDEO  
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the  
AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.  
2. S VIDEO  
3. VIDEO  
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2  
jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.  
• This unit does not accept analog component video signals with  
1080p of resolution.  
• The OSD signal is not output at the VCR OUT, DVR OUT and  
HDMI MONITOR OUT jacks and is not recorded.  
• This unit does not deinterlace any analog video signals.  
17 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Connecting a TV monitor or projector  
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,  
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT jack of this unit.  
Notes  
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI  
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals  
being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the  
HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.  
• When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI  
connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the  
TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video  
connection.  
Make sure that this unit and other  
components are unplugged from the  
AC wall outlets.  
• Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN 1 or  
HDMI IN 2 jack to display the video images on the video  
monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.  
y
You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or  
on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack  
of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND  
MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
HDMI  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PR  
PB  
Y
OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
PR  
PB  
Y
HDMI in  
Component video in  
S
V
S-video in  
Video in  
TV (or projector)  
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
18 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Connecting other components  
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 81), the  
converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT  
jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video  
connections between each component.  
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the  
default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or  
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for  
“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O  
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 78).  
Make sure that this unit and other  
components are unplugged from the  
AC wall outlets.  
Notes  
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT  
(OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks,  
priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT  
(COAXIAL) jack.  
• When “VIDEO CONV.is set to “OFF” (see page 81), be sure  
to make the same type of video connections as those made for  
your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV  
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your  
other components to the VIDEO jacks.  
Connecting a DVD player  
DVD player  
Optical out  
Audio out  
Video out  
S-video out  
Coaxial out  
HDMI out  
Component video out  
R
L
C
V
O
S
PR  
PB  
Y
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
DVD  
DVD  
HDMI  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DVD  
A
PR  
PB  
Y
DVD  
3
DVD  
6
DVD IN1  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL INPUT  
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
19 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR  
DVD recorder, PVR or VCR  
S-video in  
Video in  
Audio out  
Audio in  
Video out  
S-video out  
R
L
R
L
V
V
S
S
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR  
DVR  
VCR  
DVR  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
P
R
PB  
Y
C
DVR  
Component  
video out  
S
S
V
V
PR  
PB  
Y
Audio in  
L
R
L
Audio out  
R
DVD recorder, PVR  
Connecting a set-top box  
Satellite receiver, cable TV  
receiver or HDTV decoder  
S-video out  
Video out  
Component video out  
L
R
V
O
S
PR  
PB  
Y
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
DTV/CBL  
DTV/CBL  
HDMI  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
B
DTV/CBL  
PB  
PR  
Y
DTV/CBL  
4
DTV/CBL IN2  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL INPUT  
20 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Connecting audio components  
Notes  
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the  
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O  
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 78).  
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the  
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.  
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-  
output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.  
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,  
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.  
Turntable  
CD player  
L
R
C
L
R
AUDIO  
L
GND  
R
IN  
OUT  
MD/  
PHONO  
CD  
(PLAY)CD-R (REC)  
MD/CD-R MD/CD-R  
CD  
5
1
2
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
R
L
R
L
O
O
CD recorder, MD  
recorder or tape deck  
indicates recommended connections  
indicates alternative connections  
21 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Connecting an external amplifier  
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output  
or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.  
Notes  
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.  
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 48).  
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.  
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 48).  
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 72)  
and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 72).  
3 SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks  
Surround back channel output jacks. When you only  
connect one external amplifier for the surround back  
channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.  
5
PRE OUT  
SINGLE  
CENTER  
L
R
Notes  
SUB  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUR. BACK  
WOOFER  
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front  
channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks.  
• The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks  
differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see  
page 72).  
1
3
2
4
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks  
Front channel output jacks.  
4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack  
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks  
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.  
Surround channel output jacks.  
5 CENTER PRE OUT jack  
Center channel output jack.  
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder  
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and  
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-  
amplifier.  
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 80), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT”  
in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 80) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.  
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to  
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.  
Notes  
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically  
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.  
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that  
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.  
MULTI CH  
CENTER  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
INPUT  
L
CENTER  
L
L
*1  
R
R
R
FRONT(6CH)  
SB(8CH)  
SUB  
SURROUND  
WOOFER  
FRONT(6CH)  
SB(8CH)  
SUB  
SURROUND  
WOOFER  
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player/External  
decoder (5.1-channel output)  
Multi-format player/External  
decoder (7.1-channel output)  
*1 The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in  
“MULTI CH SET” (see page 80).  
22 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Connections  
y
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal  
dock  
• If the components have the capability of the SCENE control  
signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding  
components and start the playback when you use one of the  
SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about  
the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components.  
• Connect the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit and the remote  
control input jack of the components to control the components  
by using the SCENE feature.  
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear  
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal  
dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can  
station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using  
the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod  
universal dock to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of  
this unit using its dedicated cable.  
If noises are output when you operate the SCENE  
function, set ‘SCENE IR” to “OFF” (see page 92).  
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the  
front panel  
DOCK  
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a  
game console or a video camera to this unit.  
Caution  
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other  
components before making connections.  
Notes  
Yamaha iPod universal dock  
(such as the YDS-10, sold  
separately)  
• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel  
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.  
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select  
V-AUX” as the input source.  
Using REMOTE OUT jack  
VOLUME  
Connect the component which is the Yamaha product and  
have the capability of the SCENE control signals to the  
REMOTE OUT jack as follows.  
EDIT  
SEARCH MODE  
PRESET/TUNING  
CATEGORY  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLA  
Y
SPEAKERS  
FM/AM  
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
SCENE  
MEMORY  
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
MAIN ZONE  
ON/OFF  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
SILENT CINEMA  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
REMOTE  
OUT  
VIDEO  
L
OPTICAL  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
S
V
O
L
R
Remote  
control in  
S-Video  
output  
Video Audio Optical  
output output output  
Yamaha  
component  
Game console or  
video camera  
23 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Connections  
Connecting the FM and AM  
antennas  
Connecting the power cable  
(U.S.A. model)  
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this  
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated  
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide  
sufficient signal strength.  
y
See page 8 for connection information of the supplied indoor FM  
antenna and AM loop antenna.  
AC OUTLETS  
Notes  
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.  
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an  
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.  
To the AC wall outlet  
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception  
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,  
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized  
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.  
AM loop  
antenna  
(supplied)  
AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)  
Indoor FM  
Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected  
components. Connect the power cable of your other  
components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is  
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to  
these 2 outlets is cut off when this unit is turned off. For  
information on the maximum power or the total power  
consumption of the components that can be connected to  
antenna  
(supplied)  
ANTENNA  
AM  
GND  
FM  
Memory back-up  
Outdoor AM antenna  
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33  
ft) vinyl-covered wire  
extended outdoors from a  
window.  
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data  
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.  
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power  
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the  
power supply is cut off for more than one week.  
Ground (GND terminal)  
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the  
antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth  
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.  
24 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Connections  
Setting the speaker impedance  
Turning this unit on and off  
Turning on this unit  
Caution  
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to  
“6MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm  
speakers can be also used as the front speakers.  
A
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
turn on this unit.  
A
When you turns on this unit by pressing STANDBY/  
ON, this unit is turned on.  
1
Make sure this unit is turned off.  
Refer to the right column for details.  
y
When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay  
before this unit can reproduce sound.  
B
Press and hold TONE CONTROL on the  
2
Set this unit to the standby mode  
A
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON  
to turn on this unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
A
G
Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to  
set this unit to the standby mode.  
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of  
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote  
control.  
While holding  
TONE CONTROL  
down  
STANDBY  
/ON  
y
E
You can also turn on this unit by pressing SCENE (or  
F
SCENE) buttons.  
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay  
C
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the  
front panel to select “SP IMP.”.  
before this unit can reproduce sound.  
3
“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting  
(“8MIN”) appear in the front panel display.  
B
Press TONE CONTROL on the front  
4
5
panel repeatedly to select “6MIN”.  
A
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
save the new setting and turn off this unit.  
Note  
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this  
unit.  
25 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Connections  
Front panel display  
Note  
The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when  
“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 54.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
96  
24  
VCR DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM PHONO  
t
VOLUME  
DOCK  
YPAO AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY  
MATRIX DISCRETE  
ENHANCER  
VIRTUAL  
SILENT CINEMA  
NIGHT  
SP  
dB  
A B  
HiFi DSP  
SLEEP  
DSD  
MUTE  
96/24  
LFE  
L C R  
SL SB SR  
q EX qDIGITAL  
q PL x q PL  
PCM  
ft  
q PL  
mS  
dB  
neural  
B
C
D E  
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
D........ U.S.A. and Canada models only  
1B Input signal indicators  
9 Tuner indicators  
Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct  
Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital  
audio signals.  
Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite  
Radio tuning mode (see pages 50 to 57).  
0 MUTE indicator  
2CD Decoder indicators  
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40).  
The respective indicator lights up when any of the  
decoders of this unit function.  
A VOLUME level indicator  
Indicates the current volume level.  
3 ENHANCER indicator  
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is  
selected (see page 46).  
E Sound field indicators  
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.  
4 HDMI indicator  
F VIRTUAL indicator  
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is  
input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 16).  
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see  
page 46).  
5 SILENT CINEMA indicator  
G Headphones indicator  
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound  
field program is selected (see page 46).  
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40).  
H SP A B indicators  
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.  
6 DOCK indicator  
Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod  
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)  
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23)  
and V-AUX is selected as the input source. The DOCK  
indicator also lights up when this unit is charging the  
battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode.  
I NIGHT indicator  
Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see  
page 49).  
J DSP indicators  
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP  
sound field programs are selected (see page 42).  
7 Input source indicators  
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently  
selected input source.  
K Multi-information display  
Shows the name of the current sound field program and  
other information when adjusting or changing settings.  
8 YPAO indicator  
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the  
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without  
any modifications (see page 28).  
L SLEEP indicator  
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41).  
M 96/24 indicator  
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.  
26 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
Connections  
N Input channel and speaker indicators  
Using the remote control  
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.  
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote  
control sensor on this unit during operation.  
LFE indicator  
LFE  
L C R  
SL SB SR  
Presence speaker indicators  
Input channel indicators  
Surround back speaker indicators  
Remote control sensor  
LFE indicator  
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE  
signal.  
Input channel indicators  
Indicate the channel components of the current digital  
input signal.  
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)  
30  
30  
Presence and surround back speaker  
indicators  
Light up according to the number of presence and  
surround back speakers set for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”  
“SOUND MENU” when this unit is in the auto setup  
(see page 28) or the speaker level setting in “SOUND  
W
Infrared window (  
)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the  
component you want to operate.  
y
You can make settings for surround back speakers automatically  
by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) or manually by  
adjusting settings for “SB L/R SP” (see page 73) in “SOUND  
MENU”.  
• To use the presence speakers, set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to  
“PRESENCE” (see pages 29 or 72).  
V
TRANSMIT indicator  
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared  
signals.  
K
Operation mode selector (  
)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation  
mode selector position.  
AMP  
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.  
SOURCE  
Operates the component selected with an input  
selector button (see page 86).  
TV  
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or  
Notes  
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.  
• Do not drop the remote control.  
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types  
of conditions:  
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath  
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove  
– places of extremely low temperatures  
– dusty places  
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see  
27 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM  
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room  
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid  
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied  
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening  
environment.  
Using AUTO SETUP  
2
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone  
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front  
panel.  
Notes  
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output  
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
VIDEO AUX  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as  
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If  
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be  
satisfactory.  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
y
You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that  
appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual  
uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”  
procedure.  
Omni-directional  
microphone  
• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector  
The following menu screen appears on the video  
monitor.  
K
on the remote control to AMP.  
• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker  
terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.  
AUTO:MENU  
. EXTRAꢀSPꢀASSIGNꢀꢀ  
>FRONTꢀB  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀPRESENCEꢀꢀNONEꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTOꢀ  
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL  
START  
1
Make sure of the following check points  
before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.  
Speakers are connected appropriately.  
Headphones are disconnected from this unit.  
This unit and the video monitor are turned on.  
The connected subwoofer is turned on and the  
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly  
less).  
The crossover frequency controls of the  
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.  
The room is sufficiently quiet.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Select  
[
[
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
3
Place the optimizer microphone at your  
normal listening position on a flat level  
surface with the omni-directional  
microphone heading upward.  
Optimizer microphone  
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the  
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be  
when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the  
attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone  
to the tripod (etc.).  
28 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room  
D
Press l / h to select the desired setting  
D
for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press n.  
D
Press l / h to select the desired setting of  
D
“EQ” and then press n.  
4
6
Extra speaker assignment  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN  
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the  
EXTRA SP terminals.  
Parametric equalizer type EQ  
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified  
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the  
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and  
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to  
create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can  
select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment  
from the following choices.  
Choices: FRONT B, PRESENCE, NONE  
• When you use the alternative front speaker  
Select “FRONT B”.  
Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT  
• When you use the presence speakers (see  
Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the  
speakers to the presence speakers.  
• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency  
response of all speakers with higher frequencies  
being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT  
setting sounds a little harsh.  
• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response  
of all speakers. Recommended if all of your  
speakers are of similar quality.  
• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response  
of each speaker in accordance with the sound of  
your front speakers. Recommended if your front  
speakers are of much higher quality than your other  
speakers.  
• When you do not use the EXTRA SP  
terminals  
Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP  
terminals.  
Note  
If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 92), you cannot  
select “PRESENCE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.  
D
Press n to select “START” and then press  
7
D
Press l / h to select “SETUP”.  
5
D
ENTER to start the setup procedure.  
This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test  
tones are output from each speaker during the auto  
setup procedure. Once all items are set, the  
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT  
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO  
SETUP” settings and override the previous  
settings.  
“AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD.  
Notes  
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”  
settings and restore the previous settings.  
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”  
parameters to the initial factory settings.  
• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any  
operation on this unit.  
• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in  
the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes  
for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.  
Notes  
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have  
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.  
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change  
the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see  
page 92) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SOUND MENU”  
29 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room  
This unit performs the following checks:  
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as  
follows.  
Speaker wiring WIRING  
Number of speakers SP  
Displays the number of speakers connected to this  
unit in the following order:  
Checks which speakers are connected and the  
polarity of each speaker.  
Speaker size SIZE  
Front/Back/Subwoofer  
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and  
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each  
channel.  
Speaker distance DIST  
Displays the speaker distance from the listening  
position in the following order:  
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance  
Speaker distance DISTANCE  
Checks the distance of each speaker from the  
listening position and adjusts the timing of each  
channel.  
Speaker level LVL  
Displays the speaker output level in the following  
order:  
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output  
level  
Equalizing EQUALIZING  
Checks and adjusts the tonal characteristics of all the  
speakers by the setting of “EQ”.  
Notes  
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing  
procedure, restart from step 4.  
• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are  
output.  
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure,  
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen  
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on  
page 32.  
• When this unit detects potential problems during the  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the  
number of warning messages appears in the above of  
“RESULT” (see page 32).  
Speaker level LEVEL  
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.  
The display changes as follows.  
AUTO:MENU  
EXTRAꢀSPꢀASSIGNꢀꢀ  
>FRONTꢀB  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀPRESENCEꢀꢀNONEꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTOꢀ  
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL  
. START  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Select  
[
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
[
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR  
PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK”  
procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND  
MENU” (see page 74) is automatically set to  
“REVERSE”.  
AUTO:CHECK  
INITIALIZING  
. WIRING  
SIZE/DISTANCE  
EQUALIZINGꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
LEVELꢀꢀ  
CHECKꢀCH=CENTER  
|||||;;;;;;;;  
[ꢀ]:Exit  
D
Press ENTER to display the setup results  
in detail.  
8
AUTO:RESULT  
. RESULT  
SP  
:
3/4/0.1  
AUTO:RESULT  
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
>SET CANCEL  
. RESULT  
SP  
:
3/4/0.1  
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
>SET CANCEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
RESULT:WIRING  
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK  
[ ]  
[
[
/[ ]:Select  
[ENTER]:Return  
30 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room  
D
Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between  
the setup result displays.  
D
10 Press ENTER to return to the top  
9
“AUTO:RESULT” display.  
Results of the speaker  
connection and wiring  
AUTO:RESULT  
. RESULT  
SP  
:
3/4/0.1  
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
>SET CANCEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Results of the speaker  
distance from the  
listening position  
11 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”  
D
and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to  
select “SET” or “CANCEL”.  
Results of the setting of  
each speaker size  
AUTO:RESULT  
RESULT  
SP  
:
3/4/0.1  
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
. >SET CANCEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Results of the parametric  
equalizer of each speaker  
Choices: SET, CANCEL  
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”  
results.  
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”  
results.  
Results of the speaker  
output level  
D
12 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.  
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.  
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually  
adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see  
page 69).  
SET MENU  
.
;AUTO SETUP  
;MANUAL SETUP  
.A;SIGNAL INFO  
Notes  
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may  
be longer than the actual distance depending on the  
characteristics of your subwoofer.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the  
same frequency to provide finer adjustments.  
N
13 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET  
MENU”.  
14 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from  
this unit.  
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it  
away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top  
of this unit.  
y
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of  
your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to  
recalibrate your system.  
31 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room  
If an error screen appears  
D
Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between  
the warning displays.  
2
D
Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or  
D
“EXIT” and then press ENTER.  
The following display is an example where “E-9:USER  
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.  
WARNING:W-1  
<OUT OF PHASE>  
Reverse Channel  
FL  
--  
CENTER  
PL  
SL  
AUTO:ERROR  
PR  
SR  
. E-9:USER CANCEL  
Don't operate  
any function.  
SBL  
SBR  
[
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[ENTER]:Return  
>RETRY EXIT  
y
[ ]  
[
[
/[ ]:Select  
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO  
• When the corresponding warning message is not  
applicable to a speaker, “” is displayed instead.  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Choices: RETRY, EXIT  
Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”  
procedure.  
Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”  
procedure.  
D
Press ENTER to return to the top  
“AUTO:RESULT” display.  
3
If “WARNING” appears  
When this unit detects potential problems during the  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the  
“AUTO:RESULT” display. Check the warning messages  
to correct your speaker settings.  
Note  
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the  
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
1
Make sure the pointer is pointing at  
D
“WARNING” and then press ENTER to  
display the detailed information about the  
warning.  
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates  
the number of warning messages.  
AUTO:RESULT  
. WARNING(3)  
RESULT  
SP  
:
3/4/0.1  
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft  
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB  
>SET CANCEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
32 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES  
Selecting the SCENE templates  
This unit is equipped with 18 preset SCENE templates for  
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory  
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to  
each SCENE button:  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector (or set the  
2
K
operation mode selector to AMP and then  
D
press l / h) to select the desired  
template.  
SCENE 1: DVD Viewing  
SCENE 2: Disc Listening  
SCENE 3: TV Viewing  
SCENE 4: Radio Listening  
DVD MovieꢀView  
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select  
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template  
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE  
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.  
E
F
3
Press the SCENE (or SCENE) button  
again to confirm the selection.  
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the  
SCENE button.  
Select the desired SCENE  
template  
1
or  
1
Remote control  
Front panel  
1
Assign the  
SCENE  
Notes  
template to the  
SCENE button  
• If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds  
from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is  
automatically canceled.  
SCENE template library  
(Image)  
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the  
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input  
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See  
page 84 for details.  
Selecting the desired SCENE  
template  
E
F
1
Press and hold the SCENE (or SCENE)  
button for 3 seconds.  
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the  
front panel starts to flash, and the name of the  
currently assigned SCENE template appears in the  
front panel display.  
3 seconds  
3 seconds  
1
or  
1
Remote control  
Front panel  
1
Flashes  
DVD Viewing  
33 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting the SCENE templates  
Which SCENE template would you like to select?  
Which source do you like to  
play back?  
Default  
SCENE buttons  
Which component do you  
SCENE templates  
DVD Viewing  
like for playback?  
Video sources  
1
DVD  
(DVD video,  
Recorded video)  
DVD Movie Viewing  
DVD Live Viewing  
DVR Viewing  
DVR  
DVD  
Music discs (CD,  
SACD or DVD-Audio)  
Disc Hifi Listening  
Music Disc Listening  
Disc Listening  
2
CD Hifi Listening  
CD Listening  
CD  
CD Music Listening  
Radio Listening  
Radio programs  
TUNER (FM/AM)  
XM  
4
XM Listening  
*
To enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs, you need to connect  
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) and activate the service (see  
page 53).  
iPod Listening  
iPod  
DOCK  
*
To listening to the iPod, you need to connect a Yamaha iPod universal  
dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 58).  
3
TV Viewing  
TV programs  
Video games  
DTV/CBL  
TV Sports Viewing  
Action Game Playing  
RPG Playing  
V-AUX  
LP Record Listening  
Vinyl records  
PHONO  
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 36 for details.  
34 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the SCENE templates  
Preset SCENE templates descriptions  
The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons as the default setting.  
SCENE template  
Input source  
DVD*1  
Playback mode  
STRAIGHT  
Features  
Select this SCENE template when you play back general  
contents on the DVD player.  
DVD Viewing  
1
DVD*1  
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on  
your DVD player.  
MOVIE  
Sci-Fi  
DVD Movie Viewing  
DVD Live Viewing  
DVD*1  
DVR  
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live  
video on your DVD player.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Music Video  
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on  
your digital video recorder.  
MOVIE Drama  
DVR Viewing  
DVD*1  
DVD*1  
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high  
fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player.  
PURE DIRECT  
Disc Hifi Listening  
Select this SCENE template when you play back music  
discs on your DVD player.  
STEREO  
2ch STEREO  
Music Disc  
Listening  
DVD*1  
Select this SCENE template when you play back music  
sources on your DVD player as the background music.  
STEREO  
7ch STEREO  
Disc Listening  
2
CD Hifi Listening  
CD Listening  
CD*1  
CD*1  
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high  
fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player.  
PURE DIRECT  
Select this SCENE template when you play back music  
discs on your CD player.  
STEREO  
2ch STEREO  
CD*1  
Select this SCENE template when you play back music  
source on your CD player as the background music.  
STEREO  
7ch STEREO  
CD Music Listening  
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM  
radio programs.  
TUNER  
MUSIC  
ENHANCER  
7ch Enhancer  
Radio Listening  
4
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite  
Radio programs.  
XM  
MUSIC  
ENHANCER  
7ch Enhancer  
XM Listening  
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on  
your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock.  
DOCK (V-AUX)  
DTV/CBL  
MUSIC  
ENHANCER  
7ch Enhancer  
iPod Listening  
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general  
programs on your TV.  
STRAIGHT  
TV Viewing  
3
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports  
programs on your TV.  
DTV/CBL  
V-AUX*2  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Sports  
TV Sports Viewing  
Select this SCENE template when you play action games  
such as car racing and FPS games.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Action Game  
Action Game  
Playing  
V-AUX*2  
PHONO  
Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing  
games.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Roleplaying Game  
RPG Playing  
Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl  
records on your turntable.  
PURE DIRECT  
LP Record Listening  
*1 When the connected DVD player or CD player has the  
capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to  
the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the  
DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.  
*2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod  
is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this  
unit. When the SCENE mode is deactivated and your iPod is  
stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock, this unit selects  
“DOCK” as the input source automatically.  
35 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the SCENE templates  
Creating your original SCENE  
templates  
You can create your original SCENE templates for each  
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 18 SCENE  
templates to create the original SCENE templates.  
D
Press k / n to select the desired parameter  
3
of the SCENE template and then l / h to  
select the desired value of the selected  
parameter.  
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE  
template:  
Create an original SCENE  
template  
Select the desired SCENE  
template  
INPUT: The input source component.  
MODE: The active sound field programs,  
STRAIGHT or Pure Direct mode.  
SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening  
mode.  
CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the  
CINEMA mode.  
MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the  
MUSIC mode.  
SCENE template library  
(Image)  
F
Press the SCENE button again to confirm  
the edit.  
4
1
Assign the SCENE  
template to the  
SCENE button  
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE  
template.  
Notes  
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the  
F
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input  
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See  
page 84 for details.  
You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE  
button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,  
this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with  
the new one.  
K
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
and then press and hold the desired  
F
SCENE button for 3 seconds.  
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on  
the video monitor.  
• The newly created template is only available for the assigned  
SCENE button.  
SCENE1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
.pꢀꢀꢀꢀDVDꢀViewingꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT: ꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMODE:ꢀꢀꢀꢀSTRAIGHTꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNIGHT:ꢀꢀꢀSYSTEMꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Renameꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[SCENE1]:SETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:STATUSꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
Rename the SCENE templates  
Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3  
D
then press ENTER.  
D
Press k / n to select the desired character.  
Note  
D
Press l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the  
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not  
space or the desired character.  
F
D
assigned to any of the SCENE buttons, press l / h  
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the  
menu screen.  
E
Press RETURN to cancel the new name.  
D
Press ENTER to confirm the new name.  
36 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
PLAYBACK  
Playback  
Caution  
3
Start playback on the selected source  
component or select a broadcast station.  
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source  
component.  
See page 50 for details about tuning instructions.  
See page 54 for details about XM Satellite Radio  
tuning instructions.  
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play  
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD  
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,  
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may  
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player  
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound  
output level of your CD player before you play back a  
CD encoded in DTS.  
0
J
4
Rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/  
) to adjust the volume to the desired output  
level.  
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio  
connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to  
“DTS” before the playback (see page 80).  
y
See page 48 to adjust the level of each speaker.  
• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.  
You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume  
level (see page 77).  
y
Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on  
K
the remote control to AMP.  
Basic procedure  
C
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or press  
one of the sound field program selector  
5
P
buttons ( ) repeatedly) to select the desired  
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
sound field program.  
The name of the selected sound field program appears  
in the front panel display. See page 42 for details  
about sound field programs.  
y
See page 40 to display the input source information.  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one  
A
of the input selector buttons ( )) to select  
2
the desired input source.  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fi  
Currently selected sound field program  
The name of the currently selected input source  
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.  
Available input sources  
Note  
VCR DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM PHONO  
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the  
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is  
selected as the input source (see page 38).  
ꢀꢀINPUT:ꢀDVD  
Currently selected input  
source  
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening  
preference, not merely on the name of the program.  
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically  
selects the last sound field program used with the  
corresponding input source.  
y
The corresponding input selector button on the remote  
control for the currently selected input source lights up for  
approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the  
remote control, showing which source component is  
currently being operated.  
• To display information about the currently selected sound  
field program in the OSD, see page 61 for details.  
37 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
A quick guide to contents  
When you want to...  
Selecting the front speaker set  
Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT  
A and/or FRONT B) on or off.  
See  
page  
Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound  
1
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel  
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers  
Adjust the parameters of sound field programs  
Enjoy sources with a wide dynamic range at night  
Use headphones  
repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front  
speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or  
EXTRA SP speaker terminals.  
The active front speaker set changes as follows:  
Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo  
Select a decoder to play back sources with  
Automatically set this unit to the standby mode  
FRONT A  
OFF  
FRONT B  
FRONT A  
and  
FRONT B  
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT  
component  
Use this feature to select the component connected to the  
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input  
source.  
Notes  
• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE” or “NONE” (see  
page 72).  
• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front  
speaker setting.  
Using the Zone B feature  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector to select MULTI CH  
When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 72),  
you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP  
speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).  
A
(or MULTI CH IN).  
“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.  
y
Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the  
parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 80).  
1
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel  
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.  
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in  
the main room are muted.  
Note  
Sound field programs and the night listening mode cannot be  
selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source.  
Notes  
You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers  
simultaneously.  
• If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate  
the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates  
38 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
Selecting audio input jacks  
(AUDIO SELECT)  
Displaying the current status of  
this unit on a video monitor  
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this  
feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input  
jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the  
same input source.  
You can display the operating information of this unit on a  
video monitor.  
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
y
• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO”  
in most cases.  
You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by  
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 82).  
K
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
O
and then press DISPLAY on the remote  
control.  
The current status screen appears in the OSD.  
G
I
Press AUDIO SELECT (or AUDIO SEL)  
repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack  
select setting.  
STATUSꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀVOL:-40.0dB  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMOVIEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fiꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT:ꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀA.SEL:ꢀꢀHDMIꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNIGHT:ꢀOFFꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
Available input sources  
VCR DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM PHONO  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀA.SEL:ꢀAUTO  
y
You can select the amount of time that the current status is  
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter  
in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81).  
Currently selected audio input jack select setting  
Notes  
Automatically selects input signals in the  
following order:(1) HDMI (2) Digital  
signals (3) Analog signals  
AUTO  
• The OSD signal is not output at the VIDEO output jacks  
and will not be recorded.  
You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to  
“ON” (see page 81) to display the OSD.  
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI  
signals are not input, no sound is output.  
HDMI  
Automatically selects input signals in the  
following order: (1) Digital signals input  
at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals  
input at the OPTICAL jack. When no  
signals are input, no sound is output.  
COAX/OPT  
Selects only analog signals. If no analog  
signals are input, no sound is output.  
ANALOG  
Note  
This feature is not available when no digital input jacks  
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,  
HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when  
the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks are not used. Use “I/O  
ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective  
39 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
Using your headphones  
Playing video sources in the  
background of an audio source  
You can combine a video image from a video source with  
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy  
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful  
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.  
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo  
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on  
the front panel.  
VOLUME  
A
Press the input selector buttons ( ) on the  
remote control to select a video source and then  
an audio source.  
EDIT  
SEARCH MODE  
PRESET/TUNING  
CATEGORY  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLA  
Y
SPEAKERS  
FM/AM  
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
SCENE  
MEMORY  
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
MAIN ZONE  
ON/OFF  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
SILENT CINEMA  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
MD  
MULTI CH IN  
Audio sources  
Video sources  
CD  
CD-R  
CBL  
DTV  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
DOCK  
V-AUX  
PHONO  
DVR  
y
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the  
desired setting to select the default background video input source  
of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 80).  
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode  
activates automatically (see page 46).  
Displaying the input source  
information  
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,  
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.  
Notes  
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the  
speaker terminals.  
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the  
left and right headphone channels.  
K
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
1
Muting the audio output  
N
and then press SET MENU on the remote  
control.  
L
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the  
L
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume  
the audio output.  
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.  
SET MENU  
y
.
;AUTO SETUP  
;MANUAL SETUP  
.A;SIGNAL INFO  
0
You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press  
J
VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output.  
You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”  
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 76).  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the  
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel  
display when the audio output is resumed.  
D
Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL  
D
INFO” and then press ENTER.  
The audio information about the input source appears  
in the OSD.  
2
3
D
Press l / h to toggle between the audio  
and video information displays.  
40 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Playback  
N
Press SET MENU on the remote control  
again to exit from “SET MENU”.  
Using the sleep timer  
4
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the  
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep  
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit  
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also  
automatically turns off any external components  
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24).  
Audio information  
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a  
FORMAT  
digital signal, it automatically switches to  
analog input.  
The number of samples per second taken from  
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.  
SAMPLING  
CHANNEL  
9
Press SLEEP (or set the operation mode  
selector to AMP and then press SLEEP)  
repeatedly to set the amount of time.  
K
M
The number of source channels in the input  
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a  
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front  
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is  
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.  
9
M
Each time you press SLEEP (or SLEEP), the front  
panel display changes as shown below.  
The number of bits passing a given point per  
second.  
BITRATE  
FLAG  
SLEEP 120min  
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min  
SLEEP 90min  
SLEEP 60min  
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or  
PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically  
switch decoders.  
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the  
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is  
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel  
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field  
program.  
Note  
“---” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding  
information.  
Flashes  
Video information  
SLEEP  
Resolution of the HDMI signals input or  
output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this  
unit.  
HDMI RES.  
ꢀSLEEPꢀ120minꢀ  
Error message for HDMI sources or  
connected HDMI devices. See page 98  
for details.  
HDMI ERROR  
Lights up  
SLEEP  
ꢀꢀSTRAIGHTꢀꢀ  
Canceling the sleep timer  
9
M
Press SLEEP (or SLEEP) repeatedly until  
“SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display.  
Disappears  
ꢀSLEEPꢀOFFꢀ  
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”  
disappears from the front panel display after a few  
seconds.  
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing  
G
A
STANDBY (or STANDBY/ON) to set this unit to the  
standby mode.  
41 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field programs  
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from  
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing  
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.  
y
• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in  
actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from  
the front, back, left and right.  
You can change sound field parameters. See page 61 for details.  
Selecting sound field programs  
source.  
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component  
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the  
input source (see page 38).  
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field  
program, this unit applies the selected program without  
activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.  
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to  
48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.  
• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher  
than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.  
C
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set the  
K
operation mode selector to AMP and then  
P
press one of the sound field selector buttons (  
repeatedly).  
The name of the selected sound field program appears in  
the front panel display and in the OSD.  
)
Notes  
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects  
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input  
Sound field program descriptions  
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.  
CINEMA DSP  
Name of the  
program  
Remote control  
button  
Category of the  
program  
Created sound  
fields  
or  
HiFi DSP  
MOVIE  
4
MOVIE  
Sci-Fi  
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.  
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and  
background music.  
DSP LEVEL  
P.INIT. DLY  
P.ROOM SIZE  
S.INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG. LIFT  
Program description  
Available sound field parameters (see page 63)  
Sound field indicators  
Presence sound field  
Listening position  
Surround left  
sound field  
Surround right  
sound field  
Surround back sound field  
42 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Sound field programs  
For audio music sources  
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 48).  
Notes  
• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).  
CLASSICAL  
CLASSICAL  
Hall in Munich  
HiFi DSP  
1
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal  
standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is  
at the center left of the arena.  
DSP LEVEL  
INIT. DLY  
ROOM SIZE  
LIVENESS  
DIALG.LIFT  
CLASSICAL  
CLASSICAL  
Hall in Vienna  
HiFi DSP  
1
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings  
create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.  
DSP LEVEL  
INIT. DLY  
ROOM SIZE  
LIVENESS  
DIALG.LIFT  
CLASSICAL  
CLASSICAL  
Chamber  
1
HiFi DSP  
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are  
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.  
DSP LEVEL  
INIT. DLY  
LIVENESS  
REV.TIME  
REV.DELAY  
REV. LEVEL  
DIALG.LIFT  
LIVE/CLUB  
LIVE/CLUB  
Cellar Club  
HiFi DSP  
2
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the  
listener is in a row in front of a small stage.  
DSP LEVEL  
INIT. DLY  
ROOM SIZE  
LIVENESS  
DIALG.LIFT  
LIVE/CLUB  
LIVE/CLUB  
The Roxy Theatre  
HiFi DSP  
2
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left  
of the hall.  
DSP LEVEL  
INIT. DLY  
ROOM SIZE  
LIVENESS  
REV.TIME  
REV.DELAY  
REV. LEVEL  
DIALG.LIFT  
LIVE/CLUB  
LIVE/CLUB  
The Bottom Line  
2
HiFi DSP  
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a  
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.  
DSP LEVEL  
INIT. DLY  
ROOM SIZE  
LIVENESS  
DIALG.LIFT  
43 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Sound field programs  
For various sources  
Notes  
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).  
ENTERTAIN  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Sports  
3
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,  
the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an  
optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
ENTERTAIN  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Action Game  
3
This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range  
per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining  
a clear sense of directions.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
ENTERTAIN  
ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game  
3
This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field  
designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the  
movie scenes in the game.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
For visual sources of music  
Notes  
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).  
LENTERTAIN  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Music Video  
HiFi DSP  
3  
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot  
live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to  
the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
44 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Sound field programs  
For movie sources  
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 66 for details.  
Notes  
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).  
MOVIE  
MOVIE  
Standard  
4
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel  
audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded  
by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.  
DSP LEVEL  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
S.LIVENESS  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
SB LIVENESS  
DIALG.LIFT  
MOVIE  
MOVIE  
Spectacle  
4
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.  
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very  
small to extremely large sound.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
MOVIE  
MOVIE  
Sci-Fi  
4
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.  
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and  
background music.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
MOVIE  
MOVIE  
Adventure  
4
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.  
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The  
reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
MOVIE  
MOVIE  
Drama  
4
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The  
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear  
words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.  
DSP LEVEL  
P. INIT. DLY  
P. ROOM SIZE  
S. INIT. DLY  
S. ROOM SIZE  
SB INI. DLY  
SB ROOM SIZE  
DIALG.LIFT  
MOVIE  
MOVIE  
Mono Movie  
4
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater.  
The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound  
depth.  
DSP LEVEL  
INIT. DLY  
ROOM SIZE  
LIVENESS  
REV.TIME  
REV.DELAY  
REV. LEVEL  
DIALG.LIFT  
45 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Sound field programs  
Stereo playback  
Note  
The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.  
STEREO  
STEREO  
2ch STEREO  
5
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 49 for details.  
DIRECT  
STEREO  
STEREO  
7ch STEREO  
5
HiFi DSP  
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2  
channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,  
etc.  
CT LEVEL  
SL LEVEL  
SR LEVEL  
SB LEVEL  
PL LEVEL  
PR LEVEL  
The Compressed Music Enhancer  
ENHANCER  
MUSIC ENHANCER  
2ch Enhancer  
6
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a  
compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-  
frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system.  
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo.  
Effect level  
ENHANCER  
MUSIC ENHANCER  
7ch Enhancer  
6
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.  
Effect level  
Using sound field programs without  
surround speakers  
Enjoying multi-channel sources and  
sound field programs with headphones  
(SILENT CINEMA)  
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)  
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA  
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates  
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.  
When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 73),  
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever  
you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field  
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel  
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS  
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA  
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones  
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or  
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 42). When  
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the  
front panel display.  
Note  
Notes  
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R  
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73) in the following cases:  
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT  
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).  
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component  
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the  
input source (see page 38).  
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.  
– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.  
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see  
page 48) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or  
when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 47).  
46 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Sound field programs  
Enjoying unprocessed input  
sources (Straight decoding mode)  
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel  
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right  
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into  
the appropriate channels without any additional effect  
processing.  
D
S
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) to select  
“STRAIGHT”.  
STRAIGHT  
Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode  
D
S
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) so that  
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel  
display.  
The sound effect is turned back on.  
47 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
USING AUDIO FEATURES  
Using audio features  
y
Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on  
Adjusting the speaker level  
K
the remote control to AMP.  
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while  
listening to a music source. This is also possible when  
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.  
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound  
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity  
sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode  
is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with  
the least circuitry.  
Note  
This operation will override the level adjustments made in  
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see  
F
T
Press PURE DIRECT (or PURE DIRECT)  
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.  
C
1
Press LEVEL on the remote control  
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to  
adjust.  
F
The PURE DIRECT button lights up while this unit  
is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display  
automatically dims.  
Notes  
Display  
FRONT L  
FRONT R  
CENTER  
SWFR  
Adjusted speaker  
Front left speaker  
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in  
the Pure Direct mode:  
– switching the sound field program  
– displaying the OSD  
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level  
settings)  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
Subwoofer  
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)  
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this  
unit is turned off.  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right speaker  
Surround back left speaker  
Surround back right speaker  
Presence left speaker  
Presence right speaker  
SUR. L  
SUR. R  
SUR.B.L  
SUR.B.R  
PRNS L  
PRNS R  
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation  
is performed.  
Adjusting the tonal quality  
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for  
the front left and right speaker channels.  
y
y
C
• Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can  
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.  
D
also select the speaker by pressing k / n.  
• Instead of “SUR.B.L” and “SUR.B.R”, “SUR.B” is  
displayed if “SB L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or  
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the  
setting of the speakers.  
B
1
Press TONE CONTROL on the front  
panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency  
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency  
response (BASS).  
D
Press l / h to adjust the speaker output  
level.  
2
C
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust  
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or  
the low-frequency response (BASS).  
2
D
• Press h to increase the value.  
D
• Press l to decrease the value.  
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB  
Notes  
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-  
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the  
surround speakers may not match.  
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is  
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input  
source.  
48 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Using audio features  
Notes  
Enjoying multi-channel sources in  
2-channel stereo  
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels  
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.  
You cannot use the night listening modes in the following  
cases:  
–when the Pure Direct mode (see page 48) is selected.  
–when the component connected to the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see  
page 38).  
–when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.  
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness  
depending on the input source and surround sound settings  
you use.  
P
Press STEREO on the remote control  
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.  
y
You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS  
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 74).  
You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the  
C
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.  
See page 66 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo”  
mode.  
Selecting the night listening mode  
The night listening modes are designed to improve  
listenability at lower volumes or at night.  
8
R
1
Press NIGHT (or NIGHT) repeatedly to  
select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”.  
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF  
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to  
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and  
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.  
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music  
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.  
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.  
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT  
indicator lights up in the front panel display.  
D
Press l / h on the remote control to  
2
adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA”  
or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front  
panel display.  
Effect.Lvl:MID  
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX  
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.  
• Select “MID” for standard compression.  
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.  
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are  
stored independently.  
49 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
FM/AM TUNING  
FM/AM tuning  
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and  
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use  
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of  
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset  
stations with each other.  
Note  
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.  
Automatic tuning  
Manual tuning  
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are  
strong and there is no interference.  
If the signal received from the station you want to select is  
weak, tune into it manually.  
Note  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front  
1
2
3
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the  
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.  
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.  
3
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.  
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front  
1
2
3
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.  
7
Press TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the  
AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel  
display.  
3
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.  
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.  
7
Press TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the  
AUTO indicator disappears from the front  
panel display.  
Lights up  
AUTO  
AꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
No colon (:)  
AꢀꢀFMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning  
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn  
No colon (:)  
2
the colon (:) off.  
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning  
2
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn  
the colon (:) off.  
5
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once  
to begin automatic tuning.  
4
5
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to  
4
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED  
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received  
station is shown in the front panel display.  
tune into the desired station manually.  
y
D
• Press h to tune into a higher frequency.  
Hold down the button to continue searching.  
D
• Press l to tune into a lower frequency.  
50 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
FM/AM tuning  
Notes  
Automatic preset tuning  
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station  
number is cleared when you store a new station under the  
same preset station number.  
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),  
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after  
searching for all the available stations.  
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored  
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station  
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it  
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset  
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up  
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset  
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in  
order. You can then recall any preset station easily by  
selecting the preset station number.  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front  
1
2
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.  
3
Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the  
reception band.  
Manual preset tuning  
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset  
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)  
manually.  
“FM” appears in the front panel display.  
6
Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3  
seconds.  
3
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY  
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5  
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current  
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.  
1
2
Tune into a station.  
See page 50 for tuning instructions.  
6
Press MEMORY on the front panel.  
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel  
display for approximately 10 seconds.  
Flashes  
AUTO  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
A1:FMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
Flashes  
Flashes  
4
3
Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a  
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front  
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset  
station.  
preset station group (A to E) while the  
MEMORY indicator is flashing.  
The selected preset station group letter appears.  
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel  
display.  
y
You can specify the preset number from which this unit  
4
stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then  
5
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you  
Flashes  
perform step 3 to select the preset station number under  
which the first station will be stored.  
You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store  
MEMORY  
2
FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING  
so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel  
Aꢀ:FMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
5
display and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after  
Preset station Colon (:)  
group  
6
pressing and holding MEMORY for more than 3  
seconds.  
51 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
FM/AM tuning  
5
5
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to  
select a preset station number (1 to 8) while  
the MEMORY indicator is flashing.  
2
D
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the  
remote control) to select the desired preset  
station number (1 to 8).  
5
• Press h to select a higher preset station number.  
5
The preset station group and number appear in the  
front panel display along with the station band and  
frequency.  
• Press l to select a lower preset station number.  
Flashes  
MEMORY  
A1:FMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
A1:FMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
Preset station number  
Exchanging preset stations  
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations  
with each other. The example below describes the  
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.  
6
Press MEMORY while the MEMORY  
5
indicator is flashing.  
The station band and frequency appear in the front  
panel display with the preset station group and  
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator  
disappears from the front panel display.  
4
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E  
5
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the  
1
front panel.  
See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.  
2
Press and hold EDIT for more than 3  
2
A1:FMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
seconds.  
The displayed station has been stored as A1.  
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front  
panel display.  
Notes  
Flashes  
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station  
number is cleared when you store a new station under the  
same preset station number.  
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along  
with the station frequency.  
MEMORY  
E1:FMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
Flashes  
Selecting preset stations  
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting  
the preset station group and number under which it was  
stored.  
4
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/  
3
5
E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.  
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front  
panel display.  
See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.  
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the  
K
operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER  
Flashes  
to select “TUNER” as the input source.  
MEMORY  
A5:FMꢀ88.9ꢀMHz  
Flashes  
4
D
1
Press A/B/C/D/E (or press A-E/CAT. l /  
h) to select the desired preset station group  
(A to E).  
The preset station group letter appears in the front  
panel display and changes each time you press the  
button.  
2
4
Press EDIT again.  
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and  
the assignments of the two preset stations are  
exchanged.  
52 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
XM Satellite Radio tuning  
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and  
entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip  
hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its  
passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much  
more.  
For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com.  
For Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca.  
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM  
Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.  
Note  
The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.  
Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee  
may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to  
Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in  
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are  
the property of their respective owners.  
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock  
Connect the XM Mini-Tuner and the XM Dock (sold  
separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.  
For details, see the operating instructions provided with  
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock.  
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,  
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly  
facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can  
mount it indoors or outdoors.  
• Use the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU”  
(see page 82) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level  
in the OSD. For the best reception, orient the connected the XM  
Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is displayed.  
XM  
Note  
If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the  
XM Mini-Tuner Dock may not be connected to the XM jack on  
the rear panel of this unit properly.  
XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock  
(sold separately)  
53 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
XM Satellite Radio tuning  
Activating XM Satellite Radio  
Basic XM Satellite Radio  
operations  
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock,  
inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to  
your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the  
antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving  
XM programming. There are three places to find your  
eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on  
the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0.  
Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for  
reference.  
y
Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on  
K
the remote control to SOURCE.  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press  
1
A
XM) to select “XM” as the input source.  
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in  
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio  
information (such as channel number, channel name,  
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently  
selected channel appears in the front panel display.  
Note  
Lights up  
The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.  
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at  
http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-  
2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal  
from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation  
normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods  
you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for  
up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on  
your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For more  
information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at  
www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-GET-  
XMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
VCR DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM PHONO  
[001] Preview  
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit  
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.  
Note  
The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the  
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.  
2
Search for a channel by using one of the XM  
Satellite Radio search modes.  
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see  
“All Channel Search mode” on page 55.  
• To select a channel by category, see “Category  
Search mode” on page 55.  
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see  
• To select the desired channel directly by entering  
the channel number, see “Direct number access  
y
You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM  
HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio  
broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 67).  
You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see  
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the  
front panel display or in the OSD (see page 57).  
54 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
XM Satellite Radio tuning  
Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector  
K
5
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or  
3
on the remote control to SOURCE.  
D
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change  
the preset channel number (1 to 8).  
All Channel Search mode  
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by  
2
N
1
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH  
B
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) ( ).  
MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH  
SEARCH”.  
Direct number access mode  
5
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or  
N
2
1
Press SRCH MODE on the remote control  
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or  
“CAT SEARCH”.  
D
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search  
for a channel within all channels.  
y
B
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the  
desired three-digit channel number.  
2
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and  
5
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or  
For example, to enter the number 123, press the  
D
PRESET/CH k / n).  
B
• To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front  
panel display, select channel “0”.  
numeric buttons ( ) as shown below.  
ENTERTAIN  
CLASSICAL  
LIVE/CLUB  
Category Search mode  
3
1
2
2
N
1
2
3
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH  
MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.  
The display changes as follows.  
4
D
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)  
repeatedly to change the channel category.  
<XM> --1  
5
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or  
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search  
D
for a channel within the selected channel  
category.  
<XM> -12  
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and  
5
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front  
D
panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).  
Preset Search mode  
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search  
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For  
<XM>123  
y
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the  
B
M
y
numeric buttons ( ) on the remote control and then press  
The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is  
“[001] Preview”.  
ENT to confirm the input number.  
M
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel  
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit  
2
N
confirms the entered channel number.  
1
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH  
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET  
SEARCH”.  
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter  
a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically  
confirms the entered channel number.  
B
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons ( ) or  
M
ENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode  
procedure.  
4
D
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)  
repeatedly to change the preset channel  
group (A to E).  
55 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
XM Satellite Radio tuning  
Setting the XM Satellite Radio  
preset channels  
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite  
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in  
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall  
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel  
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”  
5
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h  
4
D
(or PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select  
a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the  
MEMORY indicator is flashing.  
The preset channel number appears in the front panel  
display.  
Flashes  
MEMORY  
1
Search for a channel you want to set as a  
preset channel by using one of the XM  
Satellite Radio search modes.  
C5 [043] XMU  
Currently selected preset channel number  
page 54 for details.  
6
E
5
Press MEMORY (or XM MEMORY) to  
set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel  
as a preset channel while the MEMORY  
indicator is flashing.  
[043] XMU  
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number  
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns  
off in the front panel display.  
Currently selected channel number  
6
E
2
Press MEMORY (or XM MEMORY).  
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel  
display for approximately 10 seconds.  
C5:[043] XMU  
Colon (:)  
MEMORY  
Flashes  
Note  
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously  
stored in the same preset channel group and number is  
cleared.  
Note  
You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while  
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel  
display.  
4
D
3
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)  
repeatedly to select a preset channel group  
(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is  
flashing.  
The preset channel group letter appears in the front  
panel display.  
Flashes  
MEMORY  
C [043] XMU  
Currently selected preset channel group  
56 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
XM Satellite Radio tuning  
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric  
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM  
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a  
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by  
using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see  
page 81).  
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that  
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be  
displayed with a space.  
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio  
information  
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such  
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,  
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front  
panel display or in the OSD.  
Note  
Note  
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel  
display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio” section in  
“Troubleshooting” on page 93 for appropriate remedies.  
7
O
If you press DISPLAY (or DISPLAY) while the XM  
Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left  
in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information  
display mode toggles as described above.  
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio  
information in the front panel display  
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio  
information in the OSD  
7
O
Press DISPLAY (or DISPLAY) repeatedly to  
toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio  
information display modes.  
7
O
Press DISPLAY (or DISPLAY).  
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.  
Channel number / name  
Channel category  
XM INFORMATION  
ALL CH SEARCH  
XM  
CHAN :XMU  
:043  
CAT  
:Rock  
NAME :Coldplay  
TITLEꢀ:Speed of sound  
.( Coldplay/Spe)  
[ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL  
[ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY  
[
[
Artist name / Song title  
y
7
O
• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY (or DISPLAY)  
again.  
When the channel number / name is displayed:  
You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio  
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-  
SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81).  
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press  
[043] XMU  
D
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in  
the OSD.  
When the channel category is displayed:  
• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released  
D
if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you  
change the XM Satellite Radio channel.  
• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information  
screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM  
<CAT>ROCK  
C
Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the  
remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio  
information screen is hold.  
When the artist name / song title is displayed:  
Coldplay / Clo  
57 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
USING IPOD™  
Using iPod™  
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to  
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.  
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression  
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 46).  
Notes  
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.  
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.  
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other  
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in  
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK  
indicator lights up in the front panel display.  
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the  
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.  
Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK  
terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or  
not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 83). The  
DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.  
Controlling iPod in the menu browse  
Controlling iPod™  
mode  
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod  
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as  
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD  
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done  
of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod  
with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)  
in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for  
or without it (simple remote mode).  
your iPod to suit your personal preferences.  
Controlling iPod in the simple remote  
mode  
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,  
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without  
the aid of the OSD of this unit.  
y
• The name of the song being played also appears in the front  
panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in  
“OPTION MENU” (see page 81).  
You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play  
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-  
SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81).  
y
You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.  
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.  
Notes  
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.  
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your  
iPod.  
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front  
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are  
replaced with underscores “_”.  
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in  
the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between  
the “Settings” parameter settings.  
You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your  
iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy  
watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.  
58 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using iPod™  
The function of the play information  
1
Set the operation mode selector to  
display  
K
O
SOURCE and then press DISPLAY on  
7
8
the remote control.  
iPodꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[Play]ꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
All  
The following display appears in the OSD.  
1
ꢀ1ꢀ/ꢀ9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFrankieꢀZipperꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMade-to-orderꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀRoadꢀtoꢀIndiaꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀ||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;;ꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀ0:51ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ-7:44ꢀꢀ  
2
3
4
iPod  
Top  
Playlists  
Artists  
Albums  
Songs  
Genres  
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
5
6
9
Composers  
Settings  
1 Track number/total tracks  
2 Name of the artist  
3 Name of the album  
4 Name of the song  
5 Progress bar  
D
Press k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod  
2
D
menu and then press ENTER to begin  
playback of the selected song.  
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums  
(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),  
Composers (composers), Settings (settings)  
• Playlists > Songs  
6 Elapsed time  
7 Shuffle and repeat icons  
• Artists > Albums > Songs  
8 h (playback), e (pausing), f (search forward)  
and w (search backward)  
• Albums > Songs  
• Songs  
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs  
• Composers > Albums > Songs  
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat  
9 Remaining time  
Shuffle Shuffle  
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in  
random order.  
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums  
Select “Offto deactivate this feature.  
Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random  
order.  
Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in  
random order.  
y
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off , “  
” appears  
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.  
Repeat Repeat  
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a  
sequence of songs.  
Choices: Off, One, All  
Select “Offto deactivate this feature.  
Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.  
Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of  
songs.  
y
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off , “ or “  
1
All  
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of  
songs are being repeated.  
59 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RECORDING  
Recording  
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating  
instructions for those components.  
Caution  
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being  
recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and  
adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your  
DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output  
from the player.  
Notes  
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.  
• TONE CONTROL (see page 48) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 74) and the sound field programs (see page 42)  
do not affect recorded material.  
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.  
• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.  
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,  
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is  
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.  
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.  
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing  
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an  
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.  
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.  
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.  
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture  
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.  
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.  
3
4
Start playback on the selected source  
component or select a broadcast station.  
H
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one  
A
of the input selector buttons ( )) to select  
the source component you want to record  
from.  
Start recording on the recording component.  
60 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS  
Advanced sound configurations  
Changing sound field parameter  
settings  
D
Press k / n to select the desired sound  
D
field parameter and then l / h to change  
the selected sound field parameter value.  
4
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory  
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial  
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to  
better suit the input source or your listening room.  
PARAMETER  
MOVIE  
. ꢀ ꢀꢀSci-Fiꢀ  
ꢀPROꢀLOGIC  
Cursor  
1/2  
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB  
P.INIT.DLY;;16ms  
P.ROOM.SIZE;;1.0  
S.INIT.DLY;;20ms  
Note  
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when  
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see  
page 82). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,  
set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.  
[RETURN]:STATUS  
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound  
field parameter, see page 63.  
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the  
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the  
sound field parameter name in the OSD.  
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field  
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.  
K
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
O
and then press DISPLAY on the remote  
D
In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages.  
control.  
D
• If you press and hold l / h to change the sound field  
The following status screen appears in the OSD.  
parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown  
momentarily in the front panel display.  
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to  
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a  
sound field program group (see page 82).  
You can select the amount of time that the current status is  
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in  
“OPTION MENU” (see page 81).  
STATUSꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀVOL:-40.0dB  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMOVIEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fiꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT:ꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀA.SEL:ꢀꢀHDMIꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀNIGHT:ꢀOFFꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
O
Press DISPLAY to turn off the sound field  
parameter display.  
5
3
Press one of the sound field program  
P
selector buttons ( ) repeatedly to select the  
desired sound field program you want to  
adjust.  
61 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced sound configurations  
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position  
(DIALG.LIFT)  
Basic configuration of sound field  
programs  
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the  
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is  
at the center of the video monitor screen.  
y
To change sound field parameter settings, see page 61 for details.  
Each sound field program has some parameters defining  
the characteristics of the program. To customize the  
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/  
or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.  
The ideal  
dialogue  
position.  
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound  
field programs (DSP LEVEL)  
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect  
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field  
in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to  
adjust the level of the effect sounds.  
Increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT” when the dialogues  
are heard at the lower position of the video monitor  
screen.  
The DSP effect  
sound level is low.  
The DSP effect sound  
level is high.  
Move up to the ideal dialogue position.  
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the  
highest position.  
Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows:  
Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when  
Notes  
• The effect sound of the selected sound field  
program is too weak.  
You cannot recognize any difference between the  
sound field programs.  
• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”  
is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).  
You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial  
dialogue position.  
Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when  
• The sound is vague.  
You feel that the additional sound effect is  
excessive.  
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB  
62 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations  
Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.  
y
To change sound field parameter settings, see page 61 for details.  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the  
apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the  
first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to  
the listener.  
INIT.DLY  
P.INIT.DLY  
S.INIT.DLY  
SB INI.DLY  
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding  
room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP  
programs.  
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)  
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)  
Source sound  
Early  
reflections  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Delay  
Delay  
Delay  
Sound source  
Reflection face  
Small value = 1 ms  
Large value = 99 ms  
63 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the  
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the  
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between  
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the  
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter  
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.  
ROOM SIZE  
P.ROOM SIZE  
S.ROOM SIZE  
SB ROOM SIZE  
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding  
initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP  
programs.  
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0  
Source sound  
Early  
reflections  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Sound source  
Small value = 0.1  
Large value = 2.0  
Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual  
walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of  
a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one  
which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to  
as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter  
lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.  
LIVENESS  
S.LIVENESS  
SB LIVENESS  
Control range: 0 to 10  
Source sound  
Live  
Dead  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Small reflected  
sound  
Large reflected  
sound  
Small value = 0  
Large value = 10  
64 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation  
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment  
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening  
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.  
REV.TIME  
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s  
Reverberation  
Source sound  
Reverberation  
Early reflections  
60 dB  
60 dB  
60 dB  
REV.TIME  
REV.TIME  
REV.TIME  
Sound source  
Short  
reverberation  
Long  
reverberation  
Small value = 1.0 s  
Large value = 5.0 s  
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and  
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound  
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.  
REV.DELAY  
Control range: 0 to 250 ms  
Source sound  
(dB)  
60 dB  
Reverberation  
Time  
REV.DELAY  
REV.TIME  
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the  
stronger the reverberation becomes.  
REV.LEVEL  
Control range: 0 to 100%  
Source sound  
REV. LEVEL  
Time  
65 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced sound configurations  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi  
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.  
2ch Stereo  
DIRECT  
Choices: AUTO, OFF  
y
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only  
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 48).  
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry  
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.  
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2  
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.  
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the  
subwoofer in the following cases:  
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 72).  
– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 73) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”  
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence  
right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The  
available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.  
7ch Stereo  
CT LEVEL  
SL LEVEL  
SR LEVEL  
SB LEVEL  
PL LEVEL  
PR LEVEL  
Control range: 0 to 100%  
2-channel and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals  
of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.  
2ch Enhancer  
7ch Enhancer  
Choices: HIGH, LOW  
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.  
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.  
Selecting decoders used with sound  
field programs (Decoder Type)  
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with  
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).  
See page 45 for details about MOVIE sound field  
program.  
Selecting decoders  
Selecting decoders for 2-channel  
sources (surround decode mode)  
Use this feature to play back sources with selected  
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-  
channels.  
Available decoders  
Decoder  
Functions  
K
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and  
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any  
sources  
Q
then press SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the  
PRO LOGIC  
remote control to select the desired surround  
decoder.  
You can select from the following modes depending on the  
type of source you are playing and your personal  
preference.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro  
Logic II) processing for movie  
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder  
is not available when “SB L/R SP”  
is set to “NONE” (see page 73).  
PLIIx Movie  
PLII Movie  
y
DTS processing for movie sources  
Neo:6 Cinema  
You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press DISPLAY  
D
and then k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the  
desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the  
selected parameter by pressing  
D
l / h repeatedly on the remote control.  
66 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Advanced sound configurations  
Decoder descriptions  
Name of the  
program  
Remote control  
button  
Category of the  
program  
SUR.DECODE  
PLꢀIIxꢀMusic  
PLꢀIIꢀMusic  
SURROUND DECODE  
9
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not  
available when “SB L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 73).  
PANORAMA  
DIMENSION  
CENTER WIDTH  
Program description  
Available sound field parameters (see page 63)  
SUR.DECODE  
SURROUND DECODE  
PRO LOGIC  
9
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.  
SUR.DECODE  
PLIIx Movie  
PL II Movie  
SURROUND DECODE  
9
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”  
is set to “NONE” (see page 73).  
SUR.DECODE  
PLIIx Music  
PL II Music  
SURROUND DECODE  
9
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”  
is set to “NONE” (see page 73).  
PANORAMA  
DIMENSION  
CENTER WIDTH  
PLIIx Game  
PL II Game  
SUR.DECODE  
SURROUND DECODE  
9
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SB L/R SP”  
is set to “NONE” (see page 73).  
SUR.DECODE  
SURROUND DECODE  
Neo:6 Cinema  
9
DTS processing for movie sources.  
SUR.DECODE  
SURROUND DECODE  
Neo:6 Music  
9
DTS processing for music sources.  
C. IMAGE  
Neural Sur.  
(U.S.A. and Canada  
models only)  
SUR.DECODE  
SURROUND DECODE  
9
Neural Surround processing for any sources.  
The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2-  
channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-  
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-  
incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of  
XM Satellite Radio.  
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND  
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.  
67 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Advanced sound configurations  
Decoder parameter descriptions  
Decoder parameter  
Features  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as  
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.  
PRO LOGIC IIx Music  
PRO LOGIC II Music  
PANORAMA  
Choices: OFF, ON  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front  
or towards the rear.  
PRO LOGIC IIx Music  
PRO LOGIC II Music  
DIMENSION  
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)  
Initial setting: STD (standard)  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely  
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center  
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.  
PRO LOGIC IIx Music  
PRO LOGIC II Music  
CENTER WIDTH  
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to  
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)  
Initial setting: 3  
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center  
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.  
DTS Neo:6 Music  
C.IMAGE  
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0  
Initial setting: 0.3  
68 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)  
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this  
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening  
environment.  
Auto setup AUTO SETUP  
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 28).  
Manual setup MANUAL SETUP  
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.  
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU  
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or  
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.  
Parameter  
Features  
Page  
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover  
frequency, and the assignment of the EXTRA SP terminal.  
A)SPEAKER SET  
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.  
77  
B)SP LEVEL  
Adjusts the distance of each speaker.  
C)SP DISTANCE  
D)EQUALIZER  
E)LFE LEVEL  
F)DYNAMIC RANGE  
G)AUDIO SET  
H)HDMI SET  
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.  
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.  
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.  
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level.  
Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals.  
Selects the mode of the decoders for the 6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
I)EXTD SUR.  
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU  
Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.  
Parameter  
Features  
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.  
Changes the name of the input source.  
Page  
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT  
B)INPUT RENAME  
C)VOLUME TRIM  
Adjusts the output volume of each input source.  
Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear  
panel of this unit.  
D)DECODER MODE  
E)MULTI CH SET  
Sets the input channel numbers and other parameters of the multi channel input.  
69 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU  
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.  
Parameter  
A)DISPLAY SET  
B)MEMORY GUARD  
Features  
Page  
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.  
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.  
Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on  
the power of this unit.  
C)AUDIO SELECT  
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.  
D)PARAM.INI  
Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals.  
E)XM RADIO SET  
Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in  
the standby mode.  
F)DOCK SET  
Signal information SIGNAL INFO  
Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 40).  
70 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Using SET MENU  
Use the remote control to access and adjust each  
parameter.  
D
Press k / n repeatedly and then press  
3
D
ENTER to select and enter the desired  
menu.  
The following displays are examples where “SOUND  
MENU” is selected.  
y
You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is  
reproducing sound.  
MANUAL SETUP  
1 SOUND MENU  
MANUAL SETUP  
1 SOUND MENU  
E
D
• Press RETURN or l to return to the previous menu level.  
1/2  
2/2  
. A)SPEAKER SET  
B)SPEAKER LEVEL  
C)SP DISTANCE  
D)EQUALIZER  
. F)DYNAMIC RANGE  
G)AUDIO SET  
H)HDMI SET  
K
Set the operation mode selector to AMP  
1
I)EXTD SUR.  
N
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET  
E)LFE LEVEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
MENU”.  
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.  
D
Press k / n repeatedly and then press  
4
SET MENU  
D
ENTER to select and enter the desired  
submenu.  
.
;AUTO SETUP  
;MANUAL SETUP  
.A;SIGNAL INFO  
The following display is an example where “LFE  
LEVEL” is selected.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
SOUND MENU  
E)LFE LEVEL  
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB  
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB  
D
Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”  
D
and then ENTER to enter “MANUAL  
SETUP”.  
2
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust  
p
[
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the  
OSD.  
D
Press k / n to select the desired parameter  
D
and then l / h to change the parameter  
settings.  
5
6
MANUAL SETUP  
. 1 SOUND MENU  
2 INPUT MENU  
3 OPTION MENU  
N
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET  
MENU”.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
71 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
FRONT B speakers setting FRONT B  
The “FRONT B” parameter is available only when you set  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.  
Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B  
speakers.  
1 SOUND MENU  
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker settings or  
compensate for video signal processing delays when using  
LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU  
parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO  
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B  
Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on or off  
when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main room.  
Select “ZONE B” if the FRONT B speakers are set in  
another room. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B  
is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer  
in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sound  
at the FRONT B terminals only.  
MANUAL SETUP  
1 SOUND MENU  
MANUAL SETUP  
1 SOUND MENU  
1/2  
2/2  
. A)SPEAKER SET  
B)SPEAKER LEVEL  
C)SP DISTANCE  
D)EQUALIZER  
. F)DYNAMIC RANGE  
G)AUDIO SET  
H)HDMI SET  
I)EXTD SUR.  
E)LFE LEVEL  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Notes  
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the  
sound is output from both the headphones and the EXTRA SP  
terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.  
• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to  
“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA  
DSP mode (see page 46).  
Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET  
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.  
SOUND MENU  
. EXTRA SP ASSIGN  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ >FRONT B  
PRESENCE NONE  
Presence/Surround back channel priority  
PRIORITY  
FRONT B;;;;FRONT  
PRIORITY;;;;;---  
The “PRIORITY” parameter is available only when you  
set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.  
Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the  
surround back speakers when playing sources that contain  
surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP  
sound field programs.  
Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN  
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the  
EXTRA SP terminals.  
Choices: FRONT B, PRESENCE, NONE  
Choices: PRNS, SUR. B  
Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when  
surround back channel signals are input. The signals  
for the surround back channels will be output from the  
surround speakers.  
Select “SUR. B” to use the surround back speakers  
when surround back channel signals are detected in a  
CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals  
are output from the front speakers.  
When you use the alternative front speaker  
Select “FRONT B”.  
When you use the presence speakers (see  
Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the  
speakers to the presence speakers.  
When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals  
Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP  
terminals.  
Notes  
• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP  
ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP”.  
• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 92), you cannot  
select “PRESENCE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.  
• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out  
“AUTO SETUP” again (See page 28).  
72 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large  
Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small  
Front speakers FRONT SP  
Choices: SMALL, LARGE  
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP  
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG  
SOUND MENU  
SOUND MENU  
FRONT SP  
SUR. L/R SP  
NONE >SML LRG  
SMALL >LARGE  
When the surround speakers are large  
Select “LRG” (large).  
When the front speakers are large  
Select “LARGE” (large).  
When the surround speakers are small  
Select “SML” (small).  
When the front speakers are small  
Select “SMALL” (small).  
When you do not use the surround speakers  
Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual  
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46), and “SUR. B L/R  
SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.  
Note  
When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 72), you  
can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of  
“FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance,  
this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.  
Surround back left/right speakers SUR. B L/R SP  
Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2  
Center speaker CENTER SP  
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG  
SOUND MENU  
SUR.B L/R SP  
SOUND MENU  
CENTER SP  
SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1  
NONE >SML LRG  
When the surround back left and right  
speakers are large  
Select “LRGx2” (large x 2).  
When the center speaker is large  
Select “LRG” (large).  
When the single surround back speaker is  
large  
Select “LRGx1” (large x 1).  
When the center speaker is small  
Select “SML” (small).  
When you do not use the center speaker  
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are  
directed to the front left and right speakers.  
When the surround back left and right  
speakers are small  
Select “SMLx2” (small x 2).  
When the single surround back speaker is  
small  
Select “SMLx1” (small x 1).  
When you do not use the surround back  
speakers  
Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel  
signals are directed to the surround left and right  
speakers.  
73 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT  
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE  
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if  
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.  
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE  
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.  
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH  
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE  
SOUND MENU  
SOUND MENU  
LFE/BASS OUT  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
SWFR FRNT>BOTH  
>NORMAL REVERSE  
Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the  
phase of your subwoofer.  
Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your  
subwoofer.  
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit  
and you want to get natural bass sound  
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well  
as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to  
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.  
Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL  
Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each  
speaker.  
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit  
and you want to get rich bass sound  
Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of  
any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE  
signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other  
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to  
the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front  
left and right channels are directed to the front left and  
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the  
“FRONT SP” setting.  
Initial setting: 0.0 dB  
SOUND MENU  
B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2  
__________  
-
+
.
FL;;;;;;;;;;  
FR;;;;;;;;;;  
C;;;;;;;;;;  
SWFR;;;;;;;;;;  
When you do not use a subwoofer  
Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the  
low-frequency signals of the front left and right  
channels, and the low-frequency signals of other  
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed  
to the front left and right speakers regardless of the  
“FRONT SP” setting.  
Adjusted speaker  
Front left speaker  
SPEAKER LEVEL  
FL  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
FR  
C
Bass crossover CROSSOVER  
Subwoofer  
SWFR  
SL  
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the  
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in  
“SPEAKER SET” (see page 73). All frequencies below  
the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to  
the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER  
SET” (see page 73).  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right speaker  
Surround back right speaker  
Surround back left speaker  
Presence left speaker  
Presence right speaker  
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
PL  
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,  
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz  
SOUND MENU  
CROSSOVER  
PR  
Notes  
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting  
of the speakers.  
FREQ;;;80Hz  
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SB.L/R SP”  
is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 73).  
74 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE  
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each  
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.  
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the  
main listening position. However, this is not possible in  
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay  
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all  
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same  
time.  
Equalizer D)EQUALIZER  
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the  
graphic equalizer.  
Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT  
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.  
Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF  
SOUND MENU  
D)EQUALIZER  
EQ TYPE SELECT  
CENTER GEQ  
SOUND MENU  
.
C)SP DISTANCE  
1/2  
. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet  
FRONT L;;;10.0ft  
FRONT R;;;10.0ft  
CENTER;;;;10.0ft  
SWFR;;;;;;10.0ft  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust  
[ ]/[ꢀ]:CT GEQ  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
p
[
Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer  
adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28).  
Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in 5-  
frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal  
quality of the center speaker matches that of the front  
p
[
Unit UNIT  
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)  
Initial setting:  
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)  
[Other models]: meters (m)  
D
left and right speakers. Press k / n to display the  
graphic equalizer screen.  
Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature.  
Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.  
Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.  
Note  
Speaker distances  
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)  
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)  
When you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 28),  
“AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting.  
Test tone TEST  
Initial setting:  
FRONT L/FRONT R/CENTER/SWFR/SUR. L/SUR. R/  
PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
SB L/SB R: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)  
SOUND MENU  
. TEST >OFF ON  
______  
-
+
100Hz ;;;;;;  
300Hz ;;;;;;  
1kHz ;;;;;;  
3kHz ;;;;;;  
10kHz ;;;;;;  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
SP DISTANCE  
FRONT L  
FRONT R  
CENTER  
SWFR  
Adjusted speaker  
Front left speaker  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust  
p
[
Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”  
while listening to a test tone.  
Choices: OFF, ON  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently  
selected source component.  
Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and  
front left speakers.  
Subwoofer  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right speaker  
Surround back left speaker  
Surround back right speaker  
Presence left speaker  
Presence right speaker  
SUR. L  
SUR. R  
SB L  
SB R  
PRNS L  
PRNS R  
Notes  
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting  
of the speakers.  
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SB L/R  
SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 73).  
75 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ  
Use to match the tonal quality of the center speaker with  
that of the front left and right speakers. You can adjust 5  
frequency bands (100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and  
10 kHz).  
Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE  
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range  
compression to be applied to your speakers or  
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is  
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.  
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB  
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low  
volume levels.  
SOUND MENU  
Select “STD” (standard) for general use.  
Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest  
amount of dynamic range.  
TEST >OFF ON  
______  
-
+
. 100Hz ;;;;;;  
300Hz ;;;;;;  
1kHz ;;;;;;  
3kHz ;;;;;;  
10kHz ;;;;;;  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust  
SOUND MENU  
p
[
F)DYNAMIC RANGE  
y
. SP: MIN STD>MAX  
HP: MIN STD>MAX  
D
D
Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust  
the selected frequency band.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
p
[
Note  
The “CENTER GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when  
“CENTER GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.  
Speaker SP  
Adjusts the speaker compression.  
Low-frequency effect level  
E)LFE LEVEL  
Headphone HP  
Adjusts the headphone compression.  
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-  
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of  
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries  
low-frequency special effects which are only added to  
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit  
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.  
Control range: –20 to 0 dB  
Audio settings G)AUDIO SET  
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this  
unit.  
SOUND MENU  
G)AUDIO SET  
Control step: 1 dB  
. MUTING TYPE;FULL  
A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms  
MAX VOL.;+16.5dB  
INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF  
SOUND MENU  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
E)LFE LEVEL  
p
[
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB  
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB  
Muting type MUTING TYPE  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust  
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function  
reduces the output volume (see page 40).  
Choices: FULL, –20dB  
p
[
Speaker SPEAKER  
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.  
Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio  
output.  
Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.  
Headphone HEADPHONE  
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.  
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY  
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize  
it with the video image. This may be necessary when  
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.  
Control range: 0 to 160 ms  
Note  
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 72),  
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT  
jack.  
Control step: 1 ms  
76 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Maximum volume MAX VOL.  
Extended surround decoders  
I)EXTD SUR.  
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level of this  
unit. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud  
sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range  
is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is  
set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes  
–5.0 dB to –80.0 dB.  
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for  
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,  
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders by using the  
connected surround back speakers.  
Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB  
Control step: 5.0 dB  
SOUND MENU  
I)EXTD SUR.  
. MODE;;;;;;;;AUTO  
Notes  
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level  
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX  
VOL.” setting.  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
p
[
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial  
Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB  
and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is  
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of  
this unit next time.  
Mode MODE  
Use this feature to select the mode of the decoder driving.  
Choices: AUTO, ON, OFF  
Select “AUTO” to activate the optimum decoder to  
play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels when a signal  
flag that can be recognized by this unit is input.  
Select “ON” to play back multi-channel sources using  
the selected decoder type in “TYPE”.  
Initial volume INI VOL.  
Use this feature to set the volume level of this unit when  
the power of this unit is turned on.  
Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
Select “OFF” not to use the decoders to create 6.1/7.1  
channels.  
Decoder type TYPE  
Note  
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”  
setting.  
SOUND MENU  
I)EXTD SUR.  
. MODE;;;;;;;;;;ON  
TYPE;;;PLIIxMovie  
HDMI setting H)HDMI SET  
Use this feature to select the component to play back  
HDMI audio signals.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
p
[
Use this feature to select the decoders used to play back  
multi-channel sources when you select “ON” in “MODE”.  
SOUND MENU  
H)HDMI SET  
SUPPORT AUDIO:  
HTR-6060  
Choices: PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, EX  
Select “PLIIxMovie” to play back Dolby Digital or  
DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx  
movie decoder.  
Select “PLIIx Music” to play back Dolby Digital or  
DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx  
music decoder.  
Select “EX/ES” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS  
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX  
or DTS-ES decoder.  
Select “EX” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals  
in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX  
decoder.  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
p
[
[ENTER]:Return  
Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO  
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio  
signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected  
to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.  
Choices: HTR-6060, OTHER  
Select “HTR-6060” to play back HDMI audio signals  
on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the  
HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI  
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the  
rear panel of this unit.  
Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on  
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI  
OUT jack.  
Note  
The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack  
of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.  
77 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
y
Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when  
this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources  
correctly.  
2 INPUT MENU  
Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the  
input mode or rename the input source.  
Notes  
• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the  
speakers and the input sources.  
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:  
– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 73) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see  
page 73) is set to “NONE”.  
MANUAL SETUP  
2 INPUT MENU  
. A)I/O ASSIGNMENT  
B)INPUT RENAME  
C)VOLUME TRIM  
D)DECODER MODE  
E)MULTI CH SET  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT  
jacks is being played.  
– when the source being played does not contain surround left  
and right channel signals.  
Input/output assignment  
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT  
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.  
– when this unit is in the stereo playback, Compressed Music  
– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 92).  
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to  
“AUTO”.  
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according  
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this  
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the  
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and  
effectively connect more components.  
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select  
the corresponding component by using the INPUT  
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on  
the remote control).  
y
The input source name in parentheses indicates the default  
assigned input source.  
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C  
CMPNT-V INPUT  
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR  
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR  
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR  
INPUT MENU  
CMPNT-V INPUT  
. [A];;;;; DVD  
(
DVD  
)
[B];;;;;DTV/CBL  
(DTV/CBL))  
[C];;;;; DVR  
DVR  
(
)
78 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1  
OPTICAL OUT  
For HDMI IN jacks 1 and 2  
HDMI IN  
Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR  
[IN2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR  
Choices: (1) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,  
V-AUX, VCR, DVR  
INPUT MENU  
INPUT MENU  
OPTICAL OUT  
HDMI IN  
. [IN1];;; DVD  
( DVD  
[IN2];;;DTV/CBL  
)
. (1);;;;;MD/CD-R  
(MD/CD-R )  
(DTV/CBL))  
Input rename B)INPUT RENAME  
Use this feature to change the name of the input source  
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.  
Notes  
You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same  
type of jack.  
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT  
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority  
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT  
(COAXIAL) jack.  
INPUT MENU  
B)INPUT RENAME  
DVD -> MY DVD  
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4  
OPTICAL IN  
[ ]/[ ]:Position  
[
[
[ ]/[ ]:Chara.  
Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,  
DVR, VCR  
y
• This feature is useful when you change the input or output  
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.  
You can only rename DOCK when iPod is stationed in the  
Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.  
(3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,  
DVR, VCR  
(4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,  
DVR, VCR  
A
)
1
2
3
Press one of the input selector buttons (  
on the remote control to select the input  
source you want to change the name of.  
INPUT MENU  
OPTICAL IN  
. (2);;;;;MD/CD-R  
(MD/CD-R )  
(3);;;;; DVD  
(
DVD  
)
D
Press l / h to place the “_” (underscore)  
under the space or the character you want to  
edit.  
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL  
(DTV/CBL )  
For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN  
Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,  
V-AUX, DVR, VCR  
D
Press k / n to select the character you  
D
want to use and then press l / h to move  
(6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,  
V-AUX, DVR, VCR  
to the next space.  
Notes  
INPUT MENU  
COAXIAL IN  
You can use up to 8 characters for each input.  
D
• Press n to change the character in the following order,  
. (5);;;;;  
CD  
CD  
(6);;;;; DVD  
DVD  
D
or press k to go in the reverse order:  
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.  
(
)
)
(
(4);;;;;DTV/CBLTA  
4
5
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each  
input source.  
D
Press ENTER on the remote control to exit  
from “INPUT RENAME”.  
79 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM  
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at  
each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the  
level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in  
volume when switching between input sources.  
Choices: XM, TUNER, PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD,  
DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX, DOCK,  
MULTI CH  
Multi channel input settings  
E)MULTI CH SET  
Use this feature to set the function of the multi channel  
input.  
INPUT MENU  
E)MULTI CH SET  
. BGV;;;;; LAST  
INPUT CH;;;;;6CH  
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
Initial setting: 0.0 dB  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[
[
INPUT MENU  
BGV BGV  
Use this feature to select the video source played in the  
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks.  
C)VOLUME TRIM  
MY DVD  
DVD ->  
0.0dB  
Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR, LAST,  
OFF  
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust  
[
[RETURN]:Exit  
[
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select  
the last selected video source as the background video  
source.  
Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video  
source in the background.  
y
You can adjust the value for DOCK only when iPod is stationed  
to the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.  
• The default name (“DVD” in the display example above) and  
the new name (“MY DVD”) of the selected input source  
appears in the OSD.  
Input channels INPUT CH  
Use this setting to select the number of channels input  
from an external decoder.  
Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE  
Choices: 6CH, 8CH  
Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals.  
INPUT MENU  
Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals.  
D)DECODER MODE 1/2  
.
>AUTO LAST  
CD ;;;;AUTO  
MD/CD-R ;;;;AUTO  
DVD ;;;;AUTO  
Front input FRONT  
INPUT MENU  
E)MULTI CH SET  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[
[
. BGV;;;;; LAST  
INPUT CH;;;;;8CH  
FRONT;;; DVD  
Decoder select mode  
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for  
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks  
when you turn on the power of this unit.  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[
[
If you selected 8ch in “INPUT CH”, you can select the  
analog jacks at which the front signals from an external  
decoder will be input.  
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,  
DVR, VCR  
Choices: AUTO, LAST  
Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to  
automatically detect the type of input signals and select  
the appropriate decoder mode.  
y
Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically  
select the last decoder mode used for the connected  
input source.  
See page 22 for the connection information.  
Note  
DTS decoder prioritize setting  
Choices: AUTO, DTS  
The “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT  
CH” to “8CH”.  
Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically  
detect input signal types and select the appropriate  
input mode.  
Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the  
input mode.  
80 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
OSD shift OSD SHIFT  
3 OPTION MENU  
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.  
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.  
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)  
Control step: 1  
Initial setting: 0  
D
MANUAL SETUP  
3 OPTION MENU  
MANUAL SETUP  
3 OPTION MENU  
Press l to raise the position of the OSD.  
D
Press h to lower the position of the OSD.  
1/2  
2/2  
. A)DISPLAY SET  
B)MEMORY GUARD  
C)AUDIO SELECT  
D)PARAM. INI  
. E)XMꢀRADIOꢀSETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
F)DOCKꢀSETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
Source feature OSD display time  
OSD-SOURCE  
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the  
XM Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD  
after you perform a certain operation.  
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ENTER]:Enter  
Display settings A)DISPLAY SET  
Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during  
an operation.  
Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you  
perform a certain operation.  
Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you  
perform a certain operation.  
OPTION MENU  
A)DISPLAY SET  
OPTION MENU  
A)DISPLAY SET  
1/2  
2/2  
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0  
VIDEO CONV.;;;ON  
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0  
. OSD-SOURCE;;;30s  
OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s  
FL SCROLL;;;CONT  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
Amplifier function OSD display time  
OSD-AMP  
[
[
[
[
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the  
status and sound field parameters information screen after  
you perform a certain operation.  
Dimmer DIMMER  
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel  
display.  
Control range: 4 to 0  
Control step: 1  
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s  
Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an  
operation.  
Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you  
perform a certain operation.  
Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you  
perform a certain operation.  
D
Press l to make the front panel display dimmer.  
D
Press h to make the front panel display brighter.  
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.  
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals  
input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT  
VIDEO jacks.  
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL  
Use this feature to set whether to display the information  
(such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel  
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14  
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once  
when “XM” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source.  
Choices: CONT, ONCE  
Choices: ON, OFF  
Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and  
component video signals interchangeably.  
Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.  
Notes  
Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the  
front panel display in a continuous manner.  
Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the  
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric  
characters after scrolling all characters once.  
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line  
video signals interchangeably.  
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR  
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the  
same type of video connections between each component.  
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are  
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may  
suffer depending on your VCR.  
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video  
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such  
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.  
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a  
game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals  
even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.  
81 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD  
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP  
program parameter values and other system settings.  
Choices: OFF, ON  
Parameter initialization D)PARAM.INI  
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound  
field program within a sound field program group. When  
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the  
parameter values within that group revert to their initial  
factory settings.  
OPTION MENU  
Press the corresponding sound field program selector  
buttons on the remote control to select the sound field  
program that you want to initialize.  
B)MEMORY GUARD  
>OFF  
ON  
An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field  
program names that have been changed from their initial  
factory settings.  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[
[ENTER]:Return  
[
Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”  
feature.  
Select “ON” to protect:  
– sound field program parameters  
– all “SET MENU” items  
– all speaker levels  
Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,  
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,  
ENHANCER, SUR. DECODE  
OPTION MENU  
– SCENE template parameters  
D)PARAM. INI  
CLASSICAL  
LIVE/CLUB  
*ENTERTAINMENT  
*MOVIE  
Note  
STEREO  
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select  
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.  
ENHANCER  
SUR. DECODE  
Press DSP Key  
Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT  
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack  
select setting for the input sources when you turn on the  
power of this unit.  
Notes  
You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter  
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.  
You cannot separately initialize individual sound field  
programs.  
You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when  
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.  
Choices: AUTO, LAST  
OPTION MENU  
C)AUDIO SELECT  
>AUTO LAST  
XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[
[ENTER]:Return  
[
OPTION MENU  
E)XM RADIO SET  
Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically  
detect the type of input signals and select the  
appropriate audio input jack select setting.  
Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically  
select the last audio input jack select setting used for  
the connected input source.  
XM ANTENNA;;;95%  
[ENTER]:Return  
XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA  
Use this feature to check the current reception level of the  
XM Satellite Radio signals (see page 53). For the best  
reception, orient the XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of  
60% or more is displayed here.  
Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%  
Note  
“NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not  
connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections  
82 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)  
iPod universal dock setting F)DOCK SET  
OPTION MENU  
F)DOCK SET  
STANDBY CHARGE:  
AUTO  
[ ]/[ ]:Select  
[
[ENTER]:Return  
[
Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE  
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the  
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the  
standby mode (see page 58).  
Choices: AUTO, OFF  
Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed  
iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby  
mode.  
Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed  
iPod only when this unit is turned on.  
83 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
Remote control features  
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha  
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code  
for each input source (see page 87).  
Using the remote control for the SCENE feature  
Controlling the input source  
components in the SCENE mode  
You can operate both this unit and the input source  
component by using the remote control. You must set the  
appropriate remote control code for each input source in  
Setting the input source of the  
customized SCENE template on the  
remote control  
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE  
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE  
template on the remote control to operate the input source  
component correctly.  
F
Press the desired SCENE button on the  
1
2
F
Press the desired SCENE button on the  
remote control.  
1
2
remote control.  
Press the desired buttons in the * area below  
to control the input source component of the  
selected SCENE template.  
F
Press and hold the SCENE button and the  
A
desired input selector button ( ).  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
3
Keep holding down the buttons pressed in  
MD  
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL  
CD  
CD-R  
V
CBL  
DTV  
step 2 until the TRANSMIT indicator  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
DOCK  
V-AUX  
flashes twice again.  
DVR  
PHONO  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV VOL  
TV MUTE  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
Set to  
SOURCE  
Note  
TV  
*
TV INPUT  
If the setting of the input source is not successful, the  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
V
TRANSMIT indicator flashes repeatedly. In this case,  
repeat the setup procedure.  
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
5
6
7
8
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
ENT  
9
0
+10  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
SCENE  
buttons  
Note  
*
These buttons control the input source component. See page 86  
for details of the function of each button.  
84 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Remote control features  
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components  
Controlling this unit  
Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this  
Controlling a TV  
Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your  
K
K
unit.  
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate  
remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see  
page 87). When you set the remote control codes for both  
DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for  
DTV/CBL.  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
AV  
MD  
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
CD  
CD-R  
AV  
CBL  
DTV  
MD  
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
CD  
CD-R  
DOCK  
V-AUX  
CBL  
DTV  
DVR  
PHONO  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
*1  
DOCK  
V-AUX  
AMP  
PHONO  
*1  
DVR  
SOURCE  
TV VOL  
TV MUTE  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
AMP  
TV  
SOURCE  
TV VOL  
TV MUTE  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV  
TV INPUT  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
TV INPUT  
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
ENT  
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
9
0
+10  
5
6
7
8
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
ENT  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
*2  
*1  
9
0
+10  
SRCH MODE  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
*2  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
SRCH MODE  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
ENTER  
XM MEMORY  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
SCENE  
REC  
1
2
3
4
SCENE  
1
2
3
4
Notes  
Notes  
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the  
operation mode selector position.  
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the  
operation mode selector position.  
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component  
K
operation mode selector is set to AMP.  
Remote control  
Digital TV/Cable TV  
TV POWER  
Turns the power on or off.  
Increases or decreases the volume  
level.  
TV VOL +/–  
TV CH +/–  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
Changes the channel number.  
Mutes the audio output.  
Changes the input source.  
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode  
K
selector is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable  
85 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote control features  
Controlling other components  
K
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
other components selected with the input selector buttons.  
You must set the appropriate remote control code for each  
input source in advance (see page 87). The following table  
shows the function of each control button used to control  
other components assigned to each input selector button.  
Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate  
the selected component.  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
1
2
3
4
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
1
5
6
7
8
AV  
2
3
MD  
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL  
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
ENT  
9
0
+10  
CD  
CD-R  
7
8
CBL  
DTV  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
DOCK  
V-AUX  
SRCH MODE  
DVR  
PHONO  
ENTER  
4
5
6
AMP  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
SOURCE  
9
XM MEMORY  
TV VOL  
TV MUTE  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV  
REC  
TV INPUT  
SCENE  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
y
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
The remote control has 10 modes (input areas) to control  
components so that the remote control can operate up to 10  
different components.  
DVD  
player/  
recorder  
Remote  
control  
Digital TV/  
Cable TV  
MD/CD  
recorder  
VCR  
LD player CD player  
Tuner  
iPod  
Power *1  
Power *1  
Power *2  
Power *1  
Power *1  
Power *1  
1
2
AV POWER  
1-9, 0, +10  
Numeric  
buttons  
Numeric  
buttons  
Numeric  
buttons  
Numeric  
buttons  
Numeric  
buttons  
Numeric  
buttons  
Preset stations  
(1-8)  
Title  
Band  
3
4
TITLE  
VCR channel  
up  
PRESET/CH  
k
Up  
Up  
Preset up (1-8) Up  
Preset down  
PRESET/CH  
n
VCR channel  
down  
Down  
Down  
Left  
Down  
(1-8)  
Preset down  
(A-E)  
A-E/CAT. l Left  
A-E/CAT. h Right  
Previous menu  
Preset up  
(A-E)  
Subsequent  
menu  
Right  
Subsequent  
menu  
ENTER  
Enter  
Enter  
Return  
Return  
5
6
RETURN  
REC  
Disc skip  
(player)  
Rec  
Rec *2  
Disc skip  
Play  
Rec  
Rec (recorder)  
Play  
(Play/pause)  
p
Play  
Play  
Play *2  
Play  
Play  
*4  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward *2  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
Search  
backward  
w
f
e
*3  
Searchforward  
*2  
Searchforward  
*3  
Search forward Search forward  
Pause Pause  
Search forward Search forward Search forward  
Pause Pause Pause  
Pause  
(Play/pause)  
Pause *2  
*4  
Skip backward  
*2  
b
a
Skip backward Skip backward  
Skip forward Skip forward  
Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward  
Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward  
Skip backward  
Skip forward  
*2  
Skip forward  
Stop  
s
Stop  
Stop  
Stop *2  
Enter  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Title/Index  
Menu  
Enter  
Chapter/Time Index  
Index  
7
8
9
ENT  
Menu  
Previous menu  
Display  
MENU  
DISPLAY  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Notes  
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.  
*2 These buttons operate your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 87).  
*3 Press and hold to search backward or forward.  
*4 Simple remote mode (see page 58).  
86 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote control features  
Setting remote control codes  
You can control other components by setting the  
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of  
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote  
control codes” at the end of this manual.  
A
)
1
2
Press one of the input selector buttons (  
on the remote control to select the input area  
you want to set up.  
MD  
CD  
CD-R  
CBL  
DTV  
Remote control code default settings  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
DOCK  
V-AUX  
Input  
source  
Component  
category  
Default  
code  
Manufacturer  
PHONO  
DVR  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
DVD  
CD  
CD-R  
DVD  
YAMAHA  
YAMAHA  
YAMAHA  
62000  
71292  
42000  
U
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or  
a similar object.  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and the selected input selector button  
DTV/CBL  
TUNER  
XM  
lights up.  
TUNER  
TUNER  
YAMAHA  
YAMAHA  
82005  
82006  
DVD  
OTHER AUDIO  
ACCESSORIES  
(iPod)  
V-AUX  
YAMAHA  
82000  
Lights up  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
TRANSMIT  
DVR  
VCR  
DVR  
YAMAHA  
52001  
Flashes  
PHONO  
B
3
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) ( ) to  
enter the five-digit remote control code for  
the component to be used.  
Note  
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a  
YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this  
case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and the remote control code for the  
selected component is set.  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
TRANSMIT  
STEREO NHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
5
6
7
8
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
Flashes  
9
0
y
Refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this  
manual.  
Notes  
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one  
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.  
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step  
3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the  
setup procedure.  
• If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control  
code previously set for the selected input area is cleared.  
87 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote control features  
Resetting all remote control codes  
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes  
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory  
settings.  
U
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or  
a similar object.  
1
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice.  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
Flashes  
B
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the  
code number “9981”.  
2
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and all the remote control codes  
previously set are cleared and reset to the initial  
factory settings.  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
STEREO NHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
TRANSMIT  
5
6
7
8
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
9
0
Flashes  
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step  
2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the  
clearing procedure.  
88 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ADVANCED SETUP  
Advanced setup  
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional  
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each  
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.  
Notes  
A
B
C
• Only STANDBY/ON, TONE CONTROL and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup  
menu.  
• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.  
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.  
Using the advanced setup  
B
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to  
4
5
change the selected parameter setting.  
A
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
1
A
Press STANDBY/ON to save the new  
setting and set this unit to the standby mode.  
set this unit to the standby mode.  
y
B
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and  
2
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on  
this unit.  
A
then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this  
unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
While holding  
TONE CONTROL  
down  
STANDBY  
/ON  
C
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select  
the parameter you want to adjust.  
The name of the selected parameter appears in the  
front panel display.  
See page 90 for a complete list of available  
parameters.  
SPꢀIMP.-8ꢀMIN  
Currently selected  
parameter  
Currently selected  
parameter setting  
89 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced setup  
Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP  
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote  
control recognition. This feature is useful when you  
operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/  
amplifiers in the same room separately.  
See page 89 for the operation of the advanced setup.  
Speaker impedance SP IMP.  
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit  
so that it matches that of your speakers.  
Choices: 8MIN, 6MIN  
Choices: ID1, ID2  
Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is  
set to “00001”.  
Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is  
set to “00002”.  
Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 .  
Select “6MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 .  
SP IMP.  
Speaker  
Impedance level  
Setting remote control AMP ID codes  
You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the  
remote control.  
If you use one set (A or B),  
the impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 or  
higher.  
U
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or  
a similar object.  
1
Front  
If you use two sets (A and  
B), the impedance of each  
speaker must be 16 or  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
8Ω MIN  
flashes twice.  
*
higher.  
Center  
Surround  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
The impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 or  
higher.  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
Flashes  
Surround back  
If you use one set (A or B),  
the impedance of each  
speaker must be 4 or  
higher.  
B
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the  
code number “00001” or “00002”.  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
2
Front  
flashes twice, and the AMP ID code is changed.  
If you use two sets (A and  
B), the impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 or  
higher.  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
6MIN  
1
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
TRANSMIT  
5
6
7
8
Center  
Surround  
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
The impedance of each  
speaker must be 6 or  
higher.  
9
0
Flashes  
Surround back  
Remote  
control AMP  
ID *2  
AMP ID  
code *1  
*
Function  
To operate this unit using  
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems  
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8MIN”.  
00001  
ID1  
(initial setting)  
User presets PRESET  
(initial setting) the default code.  
To operate this unit using  
an alternative code.  
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to  
the initial factory settings (see page 100).  
Choices: CANCEL, RESET  
00002  
ID2  
*1 The remote control setting  
*2 The setting of this unit  
Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this  
unit.  
Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.  
Notes  
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit  
including the “SET MENU” parameters.  
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on  
this unit.  
90 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced setup  
Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM  
See page 89 for the operation of the advanced setup.  
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)  
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote  
control recognition.  
Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN  
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for  
remote control recognition.  
Choices: ID1, ID2  
Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID code is  
set to “82006”.  
Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID code is  
set to “82007”.  
Choices: ID1, ID2  
Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID code  
is set to “82005”.  
Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID code  
is set to “81949”.  
Setting remote control XM ID codes  
You need to set the remote control XM ID code for the  
remote control.  
Setting remote control TUNER ID codes  
You need to set the remote control TUNER ID library  
code for the remote control.  
A
Press XM to select “XM” as the input  
1
source.  
A
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the  
1
input source.  
XM  
TUNER  
U
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or  
a similar object.  
2
U
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or  
2
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
a similar object.  
flashes twice.  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice.  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
Flashes  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
STANDBY  
POWER  
Flashes  
B
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the  
code number “82006” or “82007”.  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
3
B
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the  
code number “82005” or “81949”.  
V
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
3
flashes twice, and the XM ID code is changed.  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
flashes twice, and the TUNER ID code is changed.  
1
2
3
4
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE  
STEREO ENHANCESTRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
TRANSMIT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
TRANSMIT  
5
6
7
8
9
0
Flashes  
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
9
0
Flashes  
Remote  
control XM  
ID *2  
XM ID code  
*1  
Function  
To operate this unit using  
Remote  
control  
TUNER ID *2  
TUNER ID  
code *1  
Function  
To operate this unit using  
82006  
ID1  
(initial setting) the default code.  
To operate this unit using  
an alternative code.  
(initial setting)  
82005  
ID1  
82007  
ID2  
(initial setting) the default code.  
To operate this unit using  
an alternative code.  
(initial setting)  
81949  
ID2  
*1 The remote control setting  
*2 The setting of this unit  
*1 The remote control setting  
*2 The setting of this unit  
91 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced setup  
See page 89 for the operation of the advanced setup.  
SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR  
Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the  
REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the  
SCENE mode.  
Choices: ON, OFF  
Select “ON” when the component connected to the  
REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has  
the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit  
automatically sends the remote control signals to the  
component.  
Select “OFF” when the component connected to the  
REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and  
does not have the capability of the SCENE control  
signals.  
If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack  
is not the Yamaha product and “SCENE IR” is set to  
“ON”, noise may be output. In such cases, set ‘SCENE  
IR” to “OFF”.  
Note  
If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set  
“SCENE IR” to “OFF”.  
Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP  
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier  
Choices: ON, OFF  
Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier  
function. “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to NONE”  
automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel  
audio signals at the SURROUND BACK speaker  
terminals.  
Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier  
function.  
Note  
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, you can only select “FRONT B”  
or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 72).  
92 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Troubleshooting  
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below  
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized  
Yamaha dealer or service center.  
General  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
This unit fails to turn  
on or enters the  
standby mode soon  
after the power is  
turned on.  
The power cable is not connected or the  
plug is not completely inserted.  
Connect the power cable firmly.  
The speaker impedance setting is  
incorrect.  
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.  
The protection circuitry has been  
activated.  
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this  
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wires  
for each connection do not touch anything other than  
their respective connections.  
This unit has been exposed to a strong  
external electric shock (such as lightning  
or strong static electricity).  
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the  
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then  
use this unit normally.  
No sound.  
Incorrect input or output cable  
connections.  
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,  
the cables may be defective.  
The optimizer microphone is connected.  
Disconnect the optimizer microphone.  
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.  
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,  
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.  
Audio input jack select is set to  
“ANALOG” while playing a source  
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.  
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or  
“COAX/OPT”.  
No appropriate input source has been  
selected.  
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT  
selector on the front panel (or the input selector  
buttons on the remote control).  
Speaker connections are not secure.  
Secure the connections.  
The front speakers to be used have not  
been selected properly.  
1
Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS  
on the front panel repeatedly.  
The volume is turned down.  
The sound is muted.  
Turn up the volume.  
L
J
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote  
control to resume audio output and then adjust the  
volume.  
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are  
being input from a source component,  
such as a CD-ROM.  
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this  
unit.  
The HDMI components connected to this  
unit do not support the HDCP copy  
protection standards.  
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP  
copy protection standards.  
“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”  
and “HDMI” audio signals are not being  
played back on this unit.  
Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “HTR-6060” in  
“MANUAL SETUP”.  
No picture.  
The output and input for the picture are  
connected to different types of video  
jacks.  
Set “V CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source  
components in the same way as you connect your  
video monitor to this unit.  
Non-standard video signals are input.  
93 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The sound suddenly  
goes off.  
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.  
because of a short circuit, etc.  
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each  
other and then turn this unit back on.  
The sleep timer has turned this unit off.  
The sound is muted.  
Turn this unit on, and play the source again.  
L
J
VOLUME +/– on the remote  
Press  
MUTE or  
control to resume audio output.  
Sound is heard from  
the speaker on one  
side only.  
Incorrect cable connections.  
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,  
the cables may be defective.  
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER  
LEVEL”.  
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.  
Only the center  
speaker outputs  
substantial sound.  
When playing a monaural source with a  
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal  
is directed to the center channel, and the  
front and surround speakers output effect  
sounds.  
No sound is heard  
from the center  
speaker.  
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“NONE”.  
Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.  
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for Try another sound field program.  
“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.  
No sound from the  
presence speakers.  
The sound field programs are turned off.  
D
Press  
STRAIGHT to turn them on.  
You are using a source or program  
combination that does not output sound  
from all channels.  
Try another sound field program.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting  
other than “PRESENCE”.  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.  
No sound is heard  
from the surround  
speakers.  
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.  
“NONE”.  
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode  
and a monaural source is being played  
back.  
D
Press  
STRAIGHT on the front panel so that  
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel  
display.  
No sound is heard  
from the surround  
back speakers.  
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SB L/R SP” to a setting  
“NONE” and “SB L/R SP” is  
automatically set to “NONE”.  
other than “NONE”.  
“SUR. B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set  
to “NONE”.  
Set “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting other than  
“NONE”.  
FRONT B speakers  
cannot be activated.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting  
other than “FRONT B”.  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.  
No sound from the  
center, surround or  
surround back  
speakers when the  
FRONT B speakers  
are activated.  
“FRONT B” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to Set “FRONT B” to “FRONT”.  
“ZONE B”.  
Presence speaker  
settings are not  
available in “SET  
MENU”.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting  
other than “PRESENCE”.  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.  
94 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
No sound is heard  
from the subwoofer.  
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is  
set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or  
DTS signal is being played.  
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.  
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is  
set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2-  
channel source is being played.  
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.  
The source does not contain low-  
frequency signals.  
Dolby Digital or DTS  
sources cannot be  
played. (Dolby Digital  
or DTS indicator in  
the front panel  
The connected component is not set to  
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital  
signals.  
Make an appropriate setting following the operating  
instructions for your component.  
Audio input jack select is set to  
“ANALOG”.  
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.  
display does not light  
up.)  
A humming sound is  
heard.  
Incorrect cable connections.  
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem  
persists, the cables may be defective.  
No connection from the turntable to the  
GND terminal.  
Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the  
GND terminal of this unit.  
The volume level is  
low while a record is  
being played.  
The record is being played on a turntable  
with an MC cartridge.  
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-  
head amplifier.  
The volume level  
cannot be increased,  
or the sound is  
distorted.  
The component connected to the AUDIO  
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned  
off.  
Turn on the power of the component.  
The sound effects  
cannot be recorded.  
It is not possible to record the sound  
effects with a recording component.  
A source cannot be  
recorded by a digital  
recording component  
connected to the  
DIGITAL OUTPUT  
jack.  
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the DIGITAL  
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.  
INPUT jacks.  
Some components cannot record Dolby  
Digital or DTS sources.  
A source cannot be  
recorded by an  
analog component  
connected to the  
AUDIO OUT (REC)  
jacks.  
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO  
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.  
IN jacks.  
The sound field  
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”  
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.  
parameters and some is set to “ON”.  
other settings of this  
unit cannot be  
changed.  
This unit does not  
operate properly.  
The internal microcomputer has been  
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet  
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.  
frozen by an external electric shock (such  
as lightning or excessive static electricity)  
or by a power supply with low voltage.  
This unit does not  
operate properly.  
The internal microcomputer has been  
frozen by an external electric shock (such  
as lightning or excessive static electricity)  
or by a power supply with low voltage.  
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet  
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.  
No sound is heard  
from the connected  
HDMI component.  
The HDMI component does not accept the Connect the multi-channel audio signals to the 2-  
multi-channel audio signals.  
channel audio signals at the source component such  
as a DVD player.  
95 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
“CHECK SP WIRES”  
appears in the front  
panel display.  
Speaker cables are short-circuited.  
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.  
There is noise  
interference from  
digital or radio  
This unit is too close to the digital or high- Move this unit further away from such equipment.  
frequency equipment.  
frequency equipment.  
The picture is  
disturbed.  
The video source uses scrambled or  
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.  
This unit suddenly  
enters the standby  
mode.  
The internal temperature is too high and  
the overheat protection circuitry has been  
activated.  
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then  
turn it back on.  
Tuner  
Problem  
noisy.  
See  
page  
Cause  
Remedy  
FM stereo reception is  
The characteristics of FM stereo  
broadcasts may cause this problem  
when the transmitter is too far away or  
the antenna input is poor.  
Check the antenna connections.  
Try using a high-quality directional FM  
antenna.  
Use the manual tuning method.  
There is distortion, and  
There is multi-path interference.  
The signal is too weak.  
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate  
multi-path interference.  
clear reception cannot  
be obtained even with a  
good FM antenna.  
FM  
The desired station  
cannot be tuned into  
with the automatic  
tuning method.  
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.  
Use the manual tuning method.  
Previously preset  
stations can no longer  
be tuned into.  
This unit has been disconnected for a  
long period.  
Preset the stations again.  
The desired station  
cannot be tuned into  
with the automatic  
tuning method.  
The signal is weak or the antenna  
connections are loose.  
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections  
and orient the antenna for the best reception.  
Use the manual tuning method.  
AM  
There are continuous  
crackling and hissing  
noises.  
Noise can result from lightning,  
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats  
and other electrical equipment.  
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.  
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to  
eliminate all noise.  
There are buzzing and  
whining noises.  
A TV set is being used nearby.  
Move this unit away from the TV set.  
96 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
XM Satellite Radio  
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel  
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.  
See  
page  
Status message  
Cause  
Remedy  
The XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock are  
not connected to the XM jack of this unit  
or do not work properly.  
Check XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock connections  
and orient for the best reception level.  
CHECK ANTENNA  
The XM user encryption code is being  
updated.  
Wait until the encryption code is updated.  
UPDATING  
NO SIGNAL  
LOADING  
OFF AIR  
The signal is too weak.  
Adjust the orientation of the XM Mini-Tuner for the  
best reception level.  
It takes longer than four seconds for audio Wait until the decoding process has finished.  
or text data to be decoded.  
The XM Satellite Radio channel you  
selected is not currently broadcasting any  
signals.  
Check the channel number again or select another  
XM Satellite Radio channel.  
The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer  
available.  
<XM> - - -  
No artist name or song title is available.  
- - - / - - -  
<CAT> - - -  
No channels are available for the selected  
category.  
Select another channel category by pressing  
4
D
CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT.  
l / h on the remote control) repeatedly.  
Remote control  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The remote control  
does not work or  
function properly.  
Wrong distance or angle.  
The remote control will function within a maximum  
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-  
axis from the front panel.  
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an  
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is  
striking the remote control sensor of this  
unit.  
Reposition this unit.  
The batteries are weak.  
Replace all batteries.  
The operation mode selector is set  
incorrectly.  
Set the operation mode selector correctly.  
K
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP  
position.  
When operating the component selected by the input  
K
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.  
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO  
K
area, set it to the TV position.  
The remote control code was not correctly Set the remote control code correctly using “List of  
set.  
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.  
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer  
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this  
manual.  
The ID code of the remote control and the Match the remote control ID of this unit with the  
remote control ID of this unit do not  
match.  
corresponding remote control ID code.  
97 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
HDMI  
See  
page  
Error message  
DEVICE OVER  
HDCP ERROR  
Cause  
Remedy  
The number of the connected HDMI  
components is over the limit.  
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI  
components.  
Check that the connected HDMI components support  
the HDCP copy protection standards.  
HDCP authentication failed.  
iPod  
Note  
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod  
See  
page  
Status message  
Cause  
Remedy  
This unit is in the middle of recognizing  
the connection with your iPod.  
Loading...  
This unit is in the middle of acquiring  
song lists from your iPod.  
There is a problem with the signal path  
from your iPod to this unit.  
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod  
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.  
Connect error  
Try resetting your iPod.  
The iPod being used is not supported by  
this unit.  
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod  
mini are supported.  
Unknown iPod  
Your iPod is properly stationed in a  
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the  
YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the  
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the  
connection between your iPod and this  
unit is complete.  
iPod connected  
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha  
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to  
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal  
Disconnected  
separately) connected to the DOCK  
terminal of this unit.  
the DOCK terminal of this unit.  
This unit cannot play back the songs  
currently stored on your iPod.  
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod  
are playable.  
Unable to play  
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.  
AUTO SETUP  
Before AUTO SETUP  
See  
page  
Error message  
Cause  
Remedy  
Optimizer microphone is not connected.  
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone  
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front  
panel.  
Connect MIC!  
Headphones are connected.  
Unplug the headphones.  
Unplug HP!  
98 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
During AUTO SETUP  
Error message  
See  
page  
Cause  
Remedy  
Front L/R channel signals are not detected.  
A surround channel signal is not detected.  
A presence channel signal is not detected.  
Check the front L/R speaker connections.  
Check the surround speaker connections.  
Check the presence speaker connections.  
E-1:NO FRONT SP  
E-2:NO SUR SP  
E-3:NO PRNS SP  
E-4:SBR->SBL  
Only a right surround back channel signal is Connect the surround back speaker to the  
detected.  
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS  
terminal if you only have one surround  
back speaker.  
Background noise is too loud.  
Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet  
environment.  
E-5:NOISY  
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air  
conditioners or move them away from the  
optimizer microphone.  
Surround back speakers are connected,  
though surround L/R speakers are not.  
Connect surround speakers when you use  
surround back speakers.  
E-6:CHECK SUR.  
E-7:NO MIC  
The optimizer microphone was unplugged  
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.  
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone  
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front  
panel.  
The optimizer microphone does not detect  
test tones.  
Check the microphone setting.  
E-8:NO SIGNAL  
Check the speaker connections and  
placement.  
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was  
cancelled due to user activity.  
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.  
E-9:USER CANCEL  
An internal error occurred.  
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.  
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR  
After AUTO SETUP  
See  
page  
Warning message  
Cause  
Remedy  
Speaker polarity is not correct. This  
message may appear depending on the  
speakers even when the speakers are  
connected correctly.  
Check the speaker connections for proper  
polarity (+ or –).  
W-1:OUT OF PHASE  
The distance between the speaker and the  
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).  
Bring the speaker closer to the listening  
position.  
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)  
W-3:LEVEL ERROR  
The difference of volume level among  
speakers is excessive.  
Readjust the speaker installation so that all  
speakers are set in locations with similar  
conditions.  
Check the speaker connections.  
Use speakers of similar quality.  
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.  
Check the presence speaker connections.  
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to  
“PRESENCE”, though the presence  
channel signals are not detected.  
W-4:CHECK PRNS  
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to a setting  
other than “PRESENCE”.  
Notes  
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.  
• If a warning message “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.  
• If a warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made.  
• If an error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.  
99 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RESETTING THE SYSTEM  
Resetting the system  
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.  
Notes  
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup  
menu parameters will not be initialized.  
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.  
y
A
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this  
unit to the standby mode.  
A
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
1
2
set this unit to the standby mode.  
B
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and  
A
then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this  
unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
TONE CONTROL While holding  
down  
STANDBY  
/ON  
C
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select  
3
4
“PRESET”.  
B
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to  
select “RESET”.  
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure  
without making any changes.  
A
Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your  
selection and set this unit to the standby  
mode.  
5
100 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GLOSSARY  
Glossary  
Bi-amplification connection  
Dolby Digital EX  
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a  
speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section  
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the  
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement  
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.  
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much  
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence  
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the  
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high  
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes  
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above  
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes  
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output  
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a  
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the  
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby  
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks  
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this  
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and  
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with  
“fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to  
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.  
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel  
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center  
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of  
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic  
technology. There are three modes available: “Music  
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie  
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.  
frequencies above its cutoff.  
Component video signal  
With the component video signal system, the video signal  
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB  
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be  
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each  
of these signals is independent. The component signal is  
also called the “color difference signal” because the  
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A  
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to  
output component signals.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete  
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel  
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”  
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for  
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game  
sources.  
Composite video signal  
With the composite video signal system, the video signal  
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:  
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite  
video jack on a video component transmits these three  
elements combined.  
Dolby Surround  
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system  
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front  
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog  
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound  
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces  
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is  
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,  
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby  
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital  
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the  
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects  
and directionality.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives  
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3  
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround  
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio  
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass  
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system  
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1  
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround  
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and  
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby  
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to  
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels  
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital  
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented  
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound  
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel  
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.  
DSD  
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio  
signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio  
CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at  
a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while  
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce  
distortion, a common occurrence with very high  
quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling  
rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered  
by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.  
101 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
DTS 96/24  
Neo:6  
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality  
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully  
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers  
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz  
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/  
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24  
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-  
motion video for music programs and motion picture  
soundtracks on DVD video.  
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-  
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables  
playback with the full-range channels with higher  
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There  
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources  
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.  
Neural Surround  
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in  
surround technology and has been adopted by XM  
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround  
recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural  
DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital  
Surround  
Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain  
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog  
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound  
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie  
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.  
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy  
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of  
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces  
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,  
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and  
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).  
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-  
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel  
to the existing 5.1-channel format.  
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound  
stage with superior channel separation and localization of  
audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to  
7.1 multi-channel surround playback.  
PCM (Linear PCM)  
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog  
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without  
using any compression. This is used as a method of  
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a  
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per  
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code  
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and  
then modulated for recording.  
HDMI  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first  
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video  
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such  
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video  
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports  
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as  
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI  
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-  
channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to  
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.  
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth  
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure  
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements  
of content providers and system operators. For further  
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://  
www.hdmi.org/”.  
Sampling frequency and number of  
quantized bits  
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of  
times the signal is sampled per second is called the  
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when  
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called  
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can  
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,  
while the dynamic range representing the sound level  
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.  
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider  
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the  
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the  
sound level can be reproduced.  
S-video signal  
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally  
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted  
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the  
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S  
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and  
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful  
images.  
LFE 0.1 channel  
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The  
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.  
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a  
low-frequency range compared to the full-range  
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or  
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.  
102 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION  
Sound field program information  
Elements of a sound field  
SILENT CINEMA  
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument  
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In  
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable  
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size  
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.  
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that  
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the  
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s  
instrument.  
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect  
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for  
headphones have been set for each sound field so that  
accurate representations of all the sound field programs  
can be enjoyed on headphones.  
Virtual CINEMA DSP  
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm  
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects  
even without any surround speakers by using virtual  
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual  
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that  
does not include a center speaker.  
Early reflections  
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms  
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one  
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).  
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.  
Reverberations  
These are caused by reflections from more than one  
surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so  
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous  
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the  
clarity of the direct sound.  
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent  
reverberations taken together help us to determine the  
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this  
information that the digital sound field processor  
reproduces in order to create sound fields.  
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and  
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you  
would be able to create your own listening environment.  
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a  
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any  
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is  
exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field  
processor.  
CINEMA DSP  
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were  
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect  
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for  
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room  
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can  
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in  
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured  
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound  
field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby  
Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual  
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your  
own home.  
103 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION  
Parametric equalizer information  
This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic  
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the  
Parametric EQ settings (see page 75), to optimize the  
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to  
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a  
combination of the following three parameters  
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise  
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.  
Q factor  
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as  
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the  
values 0.5 and 10.  
Frequency  
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave  
increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.  
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your  
listening requirements using a combination of the above  
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each  
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit  
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.  
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise  
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).  
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as  
in Figure 1).  
Gain  
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB  
between –20 and +6 dB.  
Figure 1  
Gain  
Frequency  
characteristic after  
correction  
Band 1  
Frequency  
Original frequency  
characteristic  
Figure 2  
Gain  
Frequency  
characteristic after  
correction  
Band 1  
Frequency  
Original frequency  
characteristic  
Band 2  
104 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIFICATIONS  
Specifications  
Volume Control ...................................... MUTE/80 dB to 16.5 dB  
AUDIO SECTION  
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,  
Surround back  
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)  
H.P.F.  
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ....................................................... 105 W  
(FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR. B L/R SP:  
SMALL/SML) ............................................................12 dB/oct.  
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.  
• Dynamic Power (IHF)  
Front L/R, 8/6/4/2 ...................................... 120/155/190/235 W  
• Maximum Output Power [Europe model]  
VIDEO SECTION  
• Video Format (Gray Back)  
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ....................................................... 140 W  
• Dynamic Headroom  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... NTSC  
[Europe model] ....................................................................... PAL  
8 ...................................................................................... 1.4 dB  
• IEC Output Power [Europe model]  
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL  
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ................................... 100 W  
• Signal Level  
• Damping Factor (IHF)  
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 (C)  
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 (PB/PR)  
Front L/R, SPEAKERS A, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω  
................................................................................. 120 or more  
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance  
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)  
PHONO (MM)........................................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ  
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ  
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ  
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more  
• Signal to Noise Ratio  
.................................................................................... 50 dB or more  
• Maximum Input Voltage  
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)  
PHONO (MM)  
Component (Video Conversion Off)  
................................................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB  
1 kHz, 0.1% THD .............................................. 60 mV or more  
CD, etc.  
Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD .............................. 2.3 V or more  
FM SECTION  
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance  
• Tuning Range  
OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ  
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ  
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, FRONT SP: SMALL)  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz  
[Europe model] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz  
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)  
................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ  
Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)  
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance  
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)  
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 ) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω  
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB  
• Frequency Response  
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)  
CD to Front L/R, 10 Hz to 100 kHz  
...................................................................................... +0/–3 dB  
Mono/Stereo .......................................................................... 0.5%  
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω  
• RIAA Equalization Deviation  
PHONO (MM) .............................................................. 0 0.5 dB  
AM SECTION  
• Total Harmonic Distortion  
• Tuning Range  
PHONO (MM) to OUT (REC)  
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V ............................................ 0.02% or less  
CD, etc. to Front L/R  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz  
[Europe model] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz  
2ch Stereo, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 .............. 0.06% or less  
GENERAL  
• Power Supply  
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)  
PHONO (MM, 5 mV) to Front L/R  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 86 dB or more  
[Europe model]  
............................................................................. 81 dB or more  
CD, etc. (Effect Off, 250 mV) to Front L/R  
........................................................................... 100 dB or more  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
[Europe model] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz  
• Power Consumption  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 380 W/480 VA  
[Europe model] ................................................................... 390 W  
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less  
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)  
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less  
• AC Outlets  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. 2 (Total 100 W maximum)  
[Europe model] ..................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)  
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)  
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more  
CD, etc.  
(5.1 kshortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more  
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 393 mm  
(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 15-1/2 in)  
• Tone Control (Front L/R)  
• Weight ............................................................. 11.6 kg (25 lbs 9 oz)  
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... 10 dB/50 Hz  
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz  
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. 10 dB/20 kHz  
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz  
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
105 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INDEX  
Index  
Connection, Turntable ......................... 21  
Connection, TV monitor ...................... 18  
Connection, VCR ................................ 20  
CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ......... 74  
CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66  
Current status display .......................... 39  
Numerics  
C
1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 69  
2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 69  
2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 46  
2ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 46  
3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 70  
7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 46  
7ch STEREO, Sound field program .... 46  
96/24 indicator ..................................... 26  
C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ......82  
C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu ..........75  
C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu .........80  
C.IMAGE, Decoder parameter ............68  
Cable plugs ...........................................15  
CAT SEARCH, XM tuning .................55  
CD player connection ...........................21  
Cellar Club, Sound field program ........43  
CENTER GEQ, Equalizer ....................76  
Center graphic equalizer, Equalizer .....76  
CENTER PRE OUT jack  
connection ........................................22  
CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............73  
Center speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ......................66  
Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........73  
CENTER WIDTH,  
D
D)DECODER MODE, Input menu ..... 80  
D)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............ 75  
D)PARAM.INI, Option menu ............. 82  
Decoder descriptions ........................... 67  
Decoder indicators ............................... 26  
Decoder mode ...................................... 80  
Decoder mode, Input menu ................. 80  
Decoder select mode,  
Decoder mode ................................. 80  
Decoder selection ................................ 66  
Decoder type,  
Extended surround decoders ........... 77  
DIALG.LIFT,  
A
A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 81  
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ..... 78  
A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 72  
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) .......... 24  
Action Game, Sound field program ..... 44  
Advanced setup .................................... 89  
Advanced sound configurations ........... 61  
Adventure, Sound field program ......... 45  
ALL CH SEARCH, XM tuning ........... 55  
All Channel Search mode,  
Decoder parameter ...........................68  
Chamber, Sound field program ............43  
Charge on standby,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 62  
Dialogue left, Sound field parameter .. 62  
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 15  
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 15  
DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ...... 68  
DIMMER, Display settings ................. 81  
Dimmer, Display settings .................... 81  
Direct number access mode,  
XM tuning ....................................... 55  
DIRECT, Sound field parameter ......... 66  
DISPLAY SET .................................... 81  
Display settings, Option menu ............ 81  
DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 30  
DISTANCE, Auto setup parameter ..... 30  
DOCK indicator .................................. 26  
Drama, Sound field program ............... 45  
DSP effect level,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 62  
DSP indicators ..................................... 26  
DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter .. 62  
DTS decoder prioritize setting,  
Decoder mode ................................. 80  
DTS Neo:6 Music ................................ 68  
DVD player connection ....................... 19  
DVD recorder connection ................... 20  
Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 76  
XM tuning ....................................... 55  
All remote control codes resetting ....... 88  
AM antenna connection ....................... 24  
AM tuning ............................................ 50  
Amplifier function OSD display time,  
Display settings ............................... 81  
Audio cable plugs ................................ 15  
Audio components connection ............. 21  
AUDIO DELAY, Audio settings ......... 76  
Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 76  
Audio information ................................ 41  
Audio input jacks selection .................. 39  
AUDIO jacks ....................................... 15  
Audio jacks .......................................... 15  
AUDIO SELECT ................................. 39  
Audio select, Option menu .................. 82  
Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 76  
Audio signal flow ................................. 17  
AUTO SETUP ............................... 28, 69  
Auto setup ............................................ 69  
AUTO: RESULT ................................. 31  
Automatic preset tuning,  
iPod universal dock setting ..............83  
CLASSICAL, Sound field category .....43  
CMPNT-V INPUT,  
Input/output assignment ...................78  
COAXIAL IN,  
Input/output assignment ...................79  
COAXIAL INPUT jack assignment,  
Input/output assignment ...................79  
COMPONENT VIDEO jack assignment,  
Input/output assignment ...................78  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............15  
Compressed Music Enhancer ...............46  
Compressed Music Enhancer effect level,  
Sound field parameter ......................66  
Connection, AM antenna connection ...24  
Connection, audio components ............21  
Connection, CD player .........................21  
Connection,  
CENTER PRE OUT jack .................22  
Connection, DVD player ......................19  
Connection, DVD recorder ..................20  
Connection, External amplifier ............22  
Connection, external decoder ...............22  
Connection, FM antenna ......................24  
Connection,  
FRONT PRE OUT jacks ..................22  
Connection, iPod universal dock .........23  
Connection, Multi-format player .........22  
Connection, Power cable ......................24  
Connection, projector ...........................18  
Connection, PVR .................................20  
Connection, set-top boxes ....................20  
Connection, speaker cable ....................14  
Connection,  
FM/AM tuning ................................. 51  
Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 50  
Available decoders  
with Sound field programs .............. 66  
E
B
E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 76  
E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 80  
ENHANCER indicator ........................ 26  
ENTERTAINMENT,  
Sound field category ....................... 44  
EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............ 75  
EQ TYPE, Auto setup parameter ........ 29  
Equalizer type select, Equalizer .......... 75  
Equalizer, Sound menu ........................ 75  
EQUALIZING,  
B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 79  
B)MEMORY GUARD,  
Option menu .................................... 82  
B)SP LEVEL, Sound menu ................. 74  
Bass cross over, Speaker settings ........ 74  
BGV, Multi channel input settings ...... 80  
BI-AMP, Advanced setup .................... 92  
Bi-Amplifier, Advanced setup ............. 92  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ........22  
Connection,  
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks ...........22  
Connection,  
Auto setup parameter ...................... 30  
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks .........22  
106 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Extended surround decoders,  
Multi-channel source playback  
in 2-channel stereo .......................... 49  
Multi-channel source playback with  
I
Sound menu .....................................77  
External amplifier connection ..............22  
External decoder connection ................22  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN,  
Auto setup parameter .......................29  
EXTRA SP ASSIGN,  
Speaker settings ...............................72  
Extra speaker assignment,  
Auto setup parameter .......................29  
Extra speaker assignment,  
I)EXTD SUR., Sound menu .................77  
Infrared window ...................................27  
INI VOL., Audio settings .....................77  
INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......63  
Initial delay, Sound field parameter .....63  
Initial volume, Audio settings ..............77  
INPUT CH,  
Multi channel input settings .............80  
Input channel and speaker indicators ...27  
Input channel indicators .......................27  
Input channels,  
Multi channel input settings .............80  
Input menu, Manual setup ....................69  
Input rename, Input menu ....................79  
Input signal indicators ..........................26  
Input source indicators .........................26  
Input source information display .........40  
Input/output assignment, Input menu ...78  
iPod universal dock connection ...........23  
iPod universal dock setting ..................83  
iPod universal dock setting,  
headphones ...................................... 46  
Multi-format player connection ........... 22  
Multi-information display ................... 26  
MUSIC ENHANCER,  
Sound field category ........................ 46  
Music Video, Sound field program ..... 44  
MUTE .................................................. 40  
MUTE indicator ................................... 26  
Muting ................................................. 40  
MUTING TYPE, Audio settings ......... 76  
Muting type, Audio settings ................ 76  
Speaker settings ...............................72  
F
F)DYNAMIC RANGE,  
N
Sound menu .....................................76  
F)XM RADIO SET, Option menu .......82  
FL SCROLL, Display settings .............81  
FM antenna ..........................................24  
FM antenna connection ........................24  
FM tuning ............................................50  
FRONT B speaker setting,  
Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type ........ 66, 67  
Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ................. 67  
Neural Sur., Decoder type ................... 67  
NIGHT indicator ................................. 26  
Night listening mode ........................... 49  
Number of speakers, Auto setup result 30  
Speaker settings ...............................72  
FRONT B speakers setting ..................72  
FRONT B, Speaker settings .................72  
Front input,  
Multi channel input settings ............80  
Front panel display ...............................26  
Front panel display scroll,  
Display settings ................................81  
FRONT PRE OUT jack connection .....22  
FRONT SP, Speaker settings ...............73  
Front speaker set selection ...................38  
Front speakers, Speaker settings ..........73  
FRONT,  
Option menu .....................................83  
iPod use ................................................58  
O
Operation mode selector ...................... 27  
OPTICAL IN,  
Input/output assignment .................. 79  
OPTICAL INPUT jack assignment,  
Input/output assignment .................. 79  
OPTICAL OUT,  
Input/output assignment .................. 79  
OPTICAL OUTPUT jack assignment,  
Input/output assignment .................. 79  
OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 28  
Option menu, Manual setup ................ 70  
OSD SHIFT, Display settings ............. 81  
OSD shift, Display settings ................. 81  
OSD-AMP, Display settings ............... 81  
OSD-SOURCE, Display settings ........ 81  
Other components controlling  
J
Jacks .....................................................15  
L
LEVEL, Auto setup parameter .............30  
LFE indicator .......................................27  
LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......74  
LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............74  
LIVE/CLUB, Sound field category ......43  
LIVENESS, Sound field parameter .....64  
Liveness, Sound field parameter ..........64  
Low-frequency effect level,  
Multi channel input settings ............80  
G
Sound menu .....................................76  
LVL, Auto setup result .........................30  
G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu ..............76  
G)DOCK SET, Option menu ...............83  
M
by remote control ............................ 86  
Other components controlling,  
H
Manual preset tuning,  
H)HDMI SET, Sound menu ................77  
Hall in Munich,  
Sound field program ........................43  
Hall in Vienna, Sound field program ...43  
HDMI ...................................................16  
HDMI IN jack assignment,  
Input/output assignment ..................79  
HDMI IN, Input/output assignment .....79  
HDMI indicator ....................................26  
HDMI setting, Sound menu .................77  
HEADPHONE .....................................76  
Headphone, Dynamic range .................76  
HEADPHONE,  
Low-frequency effect level ..............76  
Headphone,  
Low-frequency effect level ..............76  
Headphones ..........................................40  
Headphones indicator ..........................26  
HP, Dynamic range ..............................76  
Remote control ................................ 86  
FM/AM tuning .................................51  
MANUAL SETUP ...............................69  
Manual setup ........................................69  
Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............50  
MASTER ON/OFF ..............................25  
MAX VOL., Audio settings .................77  
Maximum volume ................................77  
Maximum volume, Audio settings .......77  
Memory guard, Option menu ...............82  
MODE,  
Extended surround decoders ............77  
Mode, Extended surround decoders .....77  
Mono Movie, Sound field program ......45  
MOVIE, Sound field category .............45  
MULTI CH INPUT component  
P
P.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter ... 63  
P.ROOM SIZE,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 64  
PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ...... 68  
Parameter initialization,  
Option menu .................................... 82  
Parametric equalizer information ...... 104  
Parametric equalizer type,  
Auto setup parameter ...................... 29  
Parametric equalizer,  
Auto setup parameter ...................... 30  
PHONES jack ...................................... 40  
PL II Game, Decoder type ................... 67  
PL II Movie, Decoder type .................. 67  
PL II Music, Decoder type .................. 67  
PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66  
selection ...........................................38  
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .....................22  
Multi channel input settings,  
Input menu .......................................80  
107 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Playing video sources  
Reverberation delay,  
Speaker distance,  
in the background ............................ 40  
PLII Movie, Decoder type ................... 66  
PLIIx Game, Decoder type .................. 67  
PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ........... 66, 67  
PLIIx Music, Decoder type .................. 67  
Power cable connection ....................... 24  
PR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66  
Presence and surround back  
speaker indicators ............................ 27  
Presence left speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 66  
Presence right speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ......................65  
Reverberation level,  
Sound field parameter ......................65  
Reverberation time,  
Sound field parameter ......................65  
Roleplaying Game,  
Sound field program ........................44  
ROOM SIZE, Sound field parameter ...64  
Room size, Sound field parameter .......64  
Auto setup parameter ...................... 30  
Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 30  
Speaker distance, Sound menu ............ 75  
Speaker distances ................................ 75  
Speaker impedance setting .................. 25  
Speaker impedance,  
Advanced setup ............................... 90  
Speaker level adjustment ..................... 48  
Speaker level, Auto setup parameter ... 30  
Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 30  
Speaker level, Sound menu ................. 74  
Speaker settings, Sound menu ............. 72  
Speaker size, Auto setup parameter .... 30  
Speaker wiring,  
S
S VIDEO jacks .....................................15  
S.INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter ....63  
S.LIVENESS,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 66  
Presence sound field initial delay,  
Sound field parameter ......................64  
S.ROOM SIZE,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 63  
Presence sound field room size,  
Auto setup parameter ...................... 30  
Speaker, Dynamic range ...................... 76  
SPEAKER,  
Sound field parameter ......................64  
SB INI.DLY, Sound field parameter ...63  
SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ................73  
SB LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......66  
SB LIVENESS,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 64  
Presence/Surround back channel priority,  
Speaker settings ............................... 72  
Preset channel setting, XM tuning ....... 56  
Preset SCENE templates ...................... 35  
Preset Search mode, XM tuning .......... 55  
PRESET SEARCH, XM tuning .......... 55  
Preset station selection,  
Low-frequency effect level ............. 76  
Speaker, Low-frequency effect level ... 76  
Specifications .................................... 105  
Spectacle, Sound field program ........... 45  
Sports, Sound field program ................ 44  
SR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 66  
Standard, Sound field program ............ 45  
STANDBY CHARGE,  
iPod universal dock setting ............. 83  
Standby mode ...................................... 25  
STEREO, Sound field category ........... 46  
STRAIGHT ......................................... 47  
STRAIGHT mode ............................... 47  
SUBWOOFER PHASE,  
Speaker settings ............................... 74  
Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ..... 74  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack  
connection ....................................... 22  
Supplied accessories .............................. 3  
SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI setting ..... 77  
Support audio, HDMI setting .............. 77  
SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ........... 73  
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jack  
connection ....................................... 22  
Surround back left/right speakers,  
Speaker settings ............................... 73  
Surround back sound field initial delay,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 63  
Surround back sound field liveness,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 64  
Surround back sound field room size,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 64  
Surround back speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 66  
Surround decode mode ........................ 66  
SURROUND DECODE,  
Decoder category ............................ 67  
Surround left speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ......................64  
SB ROOM SIZE,  
Sound field parameter ......................64  
SCENE 1 ................................................9  
SCENE 2 ................................................9  
SCENE 3 ................................................9  
SCENE 4 ................................................9  
SCENE IR code setting,  
Advanced setup ................................92  
SCENE IR, Advanced setup ................92  
SCENE template rename .....................36  
Sci-Fi, Sound field program .................45  
Selection, Audio input jacks ................39  
Selection, Front speaker set .................38  
Selection,  
MULTI CH INPUT component .......38  
Selection, SCENE template .................33  
SET MENU usage ................................71  
Set-top box connection .........................20  
Shuffle, iPod playback .........................59  
SILENT CINEMA ...............................46  
SILENT CINEMA indicator ................26  
SIZE, Auto setup parameter .................30  
SL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......66  
SLEEP indicator ...................................26  
Sleep timer ...........................................41  
Sound field indicators ..........................26  
Sound field programs ...........................42  
Sound field programs  
with headphones ..............................46  
Sound field programs  
without surround speakers ...............46  
SOUND MENU, Manual setup ...........72  
Sound menu, Manual setup ..................69  
Source feature OSD display time,  
Display settings ................................81  
SP A B indicators .................................26  
SP IMP., Advanced setup ....................90  
SP, Auto setup result ............................30  
SP, Dynamic range ...............................76  
Speaker cable connection .....................14  
FM/AM tuning ................................. 52  
Preset stations exchange,  
FM/AM tuning ................................. 52  
PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 90  
PRIORITY, Speaker settings ............... 72  
PRO LOGIC II Music .......................... 68  
PRO LOGIC IIx Music ........................ 68  
PRO LOGIC, Decoder type ........... 66, 67  
Projector connection ............................ 18  
Pure Direct ........................................... 48  
Pure hi-fi sound .................................... 48  
PVR connection ................................... 20  
R
Rear panel ............................................ 11  
REMOTE AMP, Advanced setup ........ 90  
Remote control AMP ID,  
Advanced setup ............................... 90  
Remote control code default settings ... 87  
Remote control codes ..............................i  
Remote control codes setting ............... 87  
Remote control TUNER ID,  
Advanced setup ............................... 91  
Remote control XM ID,  
Advanced setup ............................... 91  
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 23  
REMOTE TUN, Advanced setup ........ 91  
REMOTE XM, Advanced setup .......... 91  
Rename, SCENE template ................... 36  
Repeat .................................................. 59  
Repeat, iPod playback .......................... 59  
Resetting the system .......................... 100  
REV.DELAY,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 65  
REV.LEVEL,  
Sound field parameter ...................... 65  
REV.TIME,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 66  
Surround left/right speakers,  
Speaker settings ............................... 73  
SURROUND PRE OUT jack  
connection ....................................... 22  
Surround right speaker level,  
Sound field parameter ..................... 66  
Sound field parameter ...................... 65  
108 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Surround sound field initial delay,  
Sound field parameter ......................63  
Surround sound field liveness,  
Sound field parameter ......................64  
Surround sound field room size,  
U
W
UNIT, Speaker distance .......................75  
Unit, Speaker distance ..........................75  
Unprocessed input sources ...................47  
User presets, Advanced setup ..............90  
WIRING, Auto setup parameter .......... 30  
X
XM ANTENNA, XM Radio setting .... 82  
XM Mini-Tuner Dock ......................... 53  
XM Radio antenna,  
XM Radio setting ............................ 82  
XM Radio setting, Option menu ......... 82  
XM satellite radio activation ............... 54  
XM Satellite Radio display ................. 57  
XM satellite radio tuning ..................... 53  
Sound field parameter ......................64  
V
T
VCR connection ...................................20  
VIDEO AUX jacks ..............................23  
VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........81  
Video conversion, Display settings ......81  
Video information ................................41  
VIDEO jacks ........................................15  
Video jacks ...........................................15  
Video signal flow .................................17  
Video sources in the background .........40  
Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................46  
VIRTUAL indicator .............................26  
Volume level ........................................30  
VOLUME level indicator .....................26  
Volume Trim, Input menu ....................80  
Test tone, Equalizer .............................75  
TEST, Equalizer ...................................75  
The Bottom Line,  
Sound field program ........................43  
The Roxy Theatre,  
Sound field program ........................43  
Tonal quality adjustment .....................48  
TRANSMIT indicator ..........................27  
Troubleshooting ...................................93  
Tuner indicators ...................................26  
Turning off ...........................................25  
Turning on ............................................25  
Turntable connection ...........................21  
TV Controlling, remote control ...........85  
TV monitor connection ........................18  
TYPE, Extended surround decoders ....77  
Y
YPAO indicator ................................... 26  
Z
Zone B ................................................. 38  
About this manual  
y indicates a tip for your operation.  
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the  
button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in  
parentheses.  
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements,  
etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.  
A
• “1SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the  
attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts.  
• The symbol “” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s).  
109 En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
VOLUME  
EDIT  
SEARCH MODE  
PRESET/TUNING  
CATEGORY  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L  
SPEAKERS  
FM/AM  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
SCENE  
h
MEMORY  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
2
3
4
1
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SILENT CINEMA  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
A
B
C
D E F  
G
H
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
U
V W  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
G
H
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
AV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL  
MD  
CD  
CD-R  
I
CBL  
DTV  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
A
DOCK  
V-AUX  
PHONO  
DVR  
J
K
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
P
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
L
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
B
C
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
9
0
9
0
10  
ENT  
M
N
PRESET/CH  
SET MENU  
MENU  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
Q
R
S
T
BAND  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
D
E
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
O
XM MEMORY  
REC  
SCENE  
F
1
2
3
4
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of remote control codes  
UNITED CABLE  
10276, 10003  
US ELECTRONICS  
ESAT  
10879  
CABLE TV RECEIVER  
TV  
A-MARK  
EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775  
3M  
10033  
FOXTEL  
FUNAI  
GE  
GOI  
HITACHI  
10879, 11356  
11377  
20047, 20054,  
20160  
A-MARK  
ABC  
10008, 10144  
10237, 10003,  
10008, 10033  
10276, 10003,  
10008  
10392, 10566  
10775, 11775  
10749, 10819,  
10214, 11250,  
11518, 11523,  
11525  
ACCUSCAN 20047  
ACTION  
ADMIRAL  
VIDEOWAY  
ZENITH  
10000  
10000, 10525,  
10899  
20030  
ACCUPHASE 10003  
20017, 20047,  
20051, 20054,  
20093, 20179,  
20180, 20264,  
20463  
20761, 20783,  
20815, 20817,  
20842  
ACORN  
ACTION  
ACTIVE  
10237  
10237  
10237  
CABLE/PVR  
COMBINATION  
AMERICAST 10899  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
10810  
AMERICAST 10899  
HOUSTON  
HTS  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
11142, 10749,  
10775  
10775, 11775  
ARCHER  
BCC  
10237  
10276  
ADVENT  
BELL SOUTH 10899  
BRITISH TELECOM  
10003  
11749, 11442  
ADVENTURI 20000  
JVC  
10775, 10492,  
11507, 11531,  
11532, 11775  
11226  
AGNA  
AIKO  
AIWA  
AKAI  
20150  
20092  
21180  
20030, 20060,  
20145, 20672,  
20702, 20812  
20170, 20179  
20037  
JERROLD  
10810  
CENTURY  
DIRECTOR  
10008  
10476  
MOTOROLA 11376, 10810  
PACE  
PIONEER  
11877, 10237  
11877, 10877  
DX ANTENNA 11500  
LG  
FOSGATE  
FUJITSU  
GE  
10276  
11497  
10144  
MAGNAVOX 10724, 10722  
MASPRO 11520, 11530  
MATSUSHITA 10214  
MEMOREX 10724  
MITSUBISHI 10749  
MOTOROLA 10856  
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA  
11877, 10877  
11006  
SUPERCABLE 10276  
ALARON  
ALBA  
ALBATRON 20700, 20843  
SONY  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
10476, 10810,  
ZENITH  
10899  
10276, 10003  
ALFIDE  
20672  
GIBRALTER 10003  
GOLDSTAR 10144  
NEC  
10496, 11270,  
ALLERON  
AMBASSADOR  
20030, 20170  
DBS/PVR  
11519  
10724  
11356  
10879  
HITACHI  
10003, 10008,  
10033  
OPTIMUS  
PACE  
PANASAT  
PANASONIC 10247, 10701,  
10214, 11508,  
20150  
COMBINATION  
AMERICA ACTION  
20180  
AMERICAN HIGH  
DIRECTV  
11377, 10392,  
INSIGHT  
JERROLD  
10476, 10810  
10476, 10810,  
10276, 10003  
10033  
10639, 11142,  
11392, 11442,  
11640  
20000, 20060  
20171  
20000, 20180  
20180  
MACOM  
11526, 11527,  
11528  
10724  
11142, 10749,  
11749, 10775,  
10724, 10819,  
10722, 11442  
11142, 11442  
10392, 10566  
AMSTRAD  
AMTRON  
ANAM  
ANAM NATIONAL  
20161  
AOC 20030, 20180  
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM  
11505, 10775  
DISHPRO  
MEMOREX  
10000  
MITSUBISHI 10003  
MOTOROLA 11376, 10476,  
10810, 10276  
PAYSAT  
PHILIPS  
11505, 10775  
11505, 10775  
ECHOSTAR  
EXPRESSVU 10775  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
11142, 11442  
PHILIPS  
PROSCAN  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SHARP  
SONY  
NEC  
11496  
NOVA VISION 10008  
APEX DIGITAL20156, 20748,  
20765, 20767,  
NOVAPLEX  
PACE  
10008  
11877, 10877,  
10237, 10008  
PIONEER  
PROSCAN  
RADIOSHACK 10566, 10775  
11142, 11442  
10392  
11392  
11442  
11489  
20879  
20180  
20092, 20179,  
20180, 20451,  
20623, 20802,  
20875  
AUDINAC  
AUDIOVOX  
PANASONIC 10000, 10008,  
10144, 10107,  
RCA  
10392, 10566,  
11142, 10775,  
10855, 10143,  
11392, 11442  
11377, 11142,  
11276, 11442  
11219  
10494, 11489,  
11513, 11517  
10856  
10375, 11488  
10639, 11640  
PARAGON  
10000, 10008,  
10525  
SAMSUNG  
AVENTURA 20171  
BAYCREST  
BAYSONIC  
BEAUMARK 20017, 20030,  
20178, 20179  
BELCOR  
BELL & HOWELL  
20054, 20093,  
PENNEY  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
10000  
20186  
20180  
SATELLITE RECEIVER  
11305, 10317  
11877, 10877,  
10144, 10533,  
11021, 11500,  
11782  
SANYO  
SHARP  
AIWA  
ALPHASTAR 10772  
AUSTAR 10879  
BELL EXPRESSVU  
10775  
CHAPARRAL 10216  
DIRECTV 11377, 10392,  
11514, 11515  
SKY  
SONY  
20030  
10639, 11639,  
10163, 10275,  
10294, 11524,  
11640  
PULSAR  
QUASAR  
REGAL  
10000  
10000  
10276  
20154, 20179  
21032  
BENQ  
BRADFORD 20180  
BROCKWOOD 20030, 20178  
10566, 10639,  
11639, 11142,  
10247, 10749,  
11749, 10724,  
10819, 11856,  
11392, 11442,  
11640  
RUNCO  
10000  
STAR TRAK 10772  
THOMSON  
TIVO  
SAMSUNG  
10003, 10144  
10392, 10566  
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA  
11877, 10877,  
11142, 11442  
10749, 11749,  
10790, 10819,  
10486, 11285,  
11501, 11516,  
11530  
TOSHIBA  
BROKSONIC 20180, 20236,  
20463  
BROTHER  
BYD:SIGN  
10477, 10237,  
10003, 10000,  
10008  
20264  
21309, 21311,  
21485, 21486  
20030, 20186  
20017, 20030,  
20036, 20092,  
20178  
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM  
11505, 11005,  
SONY  
SPRUCER  
STARCOM  
11006, 11460  
10144  
10003  
UEC  
11356  
CANDLE  
CAPEHART  
10775, 11775  
11505, 11005,  
10775, 11775  
ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640  
UNIDEN  
ZENITH  
DISHPRO  
SUMITOMO 11500, 11503  
SUPERCABLE 10276  
10724, 10722  
10856, 11856  
DX ANTENNA 11530  
ECHOSTAR 11505, 11005,  
10775, 11775  
TORX  
10003  
CARNIVALE 20030  
TOSHIBA  
10000, 11509  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CARVER  
CCE  
CELEBRITY 20000  
CELERA 20765  
CHANGHONG 20156, 20765,  
20767, 20783  
CINERAL  
CITEK  
20054, 20170  
20037  
EMERSON  
20036, 20047,  
20150, 20154,  
20170, 20171,  
20178, 20179,  
20180, 20236,  
20451, 20463,  
20623  
INFINITY  
INNOVA  
INSIGNIA  
INTEQ  
JBL  
20054  
20037  
20171  
20017, 20145  
20054  
20000  
20761, 20815,  
20817  
20030  
20037  
MAXENT  
21755, 21756  
MEGAPOWER 20700  
MEGATRON 20047, 20145,  
20178  
MEMOREX  
20030, 20037,  
20150, 20154,  
20178, 20179,  
20180, 20463  
20037  
JCB  
JENSEN  
20092, 20451  
20047  
ENVISION  
ESA  
FISHER  
20030  
CITIZEN  
20000, 20030,  
20054, 20060,  
20092, 20171,  
20180, 20186,  
20451, 20463  
20180  
20171, 20812  
20000, 20054,  
20154  
JIL  
MERMAID  
MGA  
JINXING  
JUTAN  
JVC  
20030, 20150,  
20178  
20030  
FORTRESS  
FUJITSU  
20093  
20030, 20036,  
20053, 20054,  
20160, 20653,  
20731, 21172,  
21253, 21428  
20017, 20180  
20030  
20060, 20180  
20030, 20180  
20156, 20180,  
20765, 20767  
20030  
MGN TECHNOLOGY  
20178  
MICRO GENIUS  
20150  
20179, 20186,  
20683, 20809,  
20853, 21181,  
21607  
CLARION  
CLASSIC  
COLORTYME 20017, 20030,  
20047, 20054,  
20030, 20092  
MIDLAND  
20017, 20047,  
20051  
20037  
FUJITSU GENERAL  
20186  
FUNAI  
KAMP  
KAWASHO  
KEC  
KENWOOD  
KLH  
20060, 20178  
MINATO  
MITSUBISHI 20030, 20036,  
20093, 20150,  
COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS  
20047, 21447  
CONIC  
CONTEC  
CRAIG  
20000, 20171,  
20179, 20180,  
20264, 20342  
20178  
20180  
20154, 20160,  
20178, 20250,  
20836, 21150,  
21171, 21182,  
FUTURETECH 20180  
GATEWAY  
GE  
20161, 20171,  
20179, 20180  
20000, 20030,  
20054, 20171,  
20180  
21755, 21756  
KLOSS  
KONKA  
KTV  
20000, 20030,  
20047, 20051,  
20060, 20178,  
20451, 21147,  
21347, 21447  
20047  
20180  
20030, 20180,  
20463  
CROSLEY  
CROWN  
21250, 21522  
MONIVISION 20700, 20843  
MOTOROLA 20051, 20054,  
20093, 20150  
LARK  
LG  
20154  
20093, 20180,  
20672  
20030, 20054,  
20060, 20178,  
20442, 20700,  
20856, 21178,  
21265, 21378  
20030, 20179,  
20180, 20236  
20179, 20180,  
20236  
GEMINI  
GENERAL  
GIBRALTER 20000, 20017,  
20030  
GOLDSTAR 20030, 20036,  
20037, 20047,  
MTC  
20030, 20060,  
20092, 20180  
CROWN MUSTANG  
20672  
CURTIS MATHES  
20186  
MULTITECH 20179, 20180  
NAD  
20156, 20166,  
20178, 20866  
20030, 20036,  
20047, 20156,  
20170, 20178,  
20474, 20704,  
21182, 21456,  
21704  
21755  
20030, 20092,  
20178  
20030, 20092,  
20178  
20030  
21347, 21147,  
LLOYD'S  
LOGIK  
20702, 20451,  
20180, 20179,  
20178, 20166,  
20154, 20145,  
20093, 20060,  
20054, 20051,  
20047, 20037,  
20030, 20000  
20180  
20036, 20092,  
20178, 20264,  
20451, 20623,  
20661, 20672,  
21661, 21755,  
21756  
NEC  
20054, 20178,  
21378  
GOODMANS 20037  
GPX  
GRADIENTE 20053, 20170  
GRAN PRIX 20179  
GRANADA  
GRUNDIG  
LUMATRON 20037, 20264  
LXI  
20179  
20179, 20178,  
20171, 20166,  
20156, 20154,  
20093, 20060,  
20054, 20053,  
20051, 20047,  
20037, 20036,  
20030, 20017,  
20000  
NETTV  
NIKKO  
20037  
CXC  
DAEWOO  
20037, 20672,  
20683, 20706  
20179, 20180  
20179, 20180  
21034  
NIKKODO  
GRUNDY  
GRUNPY  
HAIER  
HALLMARK 20178, 20179,  
20180, 20236  
NISHI  
NORCENT  
NTC  
20748, 20824  
20092  
20000  
MACY  
MAGNASONIC  
20186  
NYON  
DAYTON  
DAYTRON  
20092  
HARLEY DAVIDSON  
20000, 20030,  
20060, 20178,  
20179, 20180  
HARMAN/KARDON  
20054  
20000, 20030,  
20054, 20092,  
20093, 20156,  
20179  
ONWA  
OPTIMUS  
20180  
20030, 20036,  
20092, 20178  
21178  
20145, 20511  
20017, 20178,  
20180  
20030, 20093,  
20150, 20154,  
20166, 20178,  
20180, 20250,  
20650  
DELL  
DENON  
DUMONT  
MAGNAVOX 21755, 21454,  
21254, 20802,  
HARVARD  
HAVERMY  
HEATHKIT  
HELIOS  
20180  
20093  
20017  
20865  
20706, 20250,  
20186, 20180,  
20179, 20171,  
20154, 20092,  
20060, 20054,  
20051, 20047,  
20037, 20036,  
20030, 20000  
OPTONICA  
ORION  
20093  
DURABRAND 20171, 20178,  
20180, 20463,  
20017, 20178,  
20179, 20180,  
20236, 20463,  
21463  
20092  
20037  
21034  
20093  
20060  
DWIN  
EATON  
HELLO KITTY 20451  
HISENSE  
HITACHI  
20748  
PACE  
PACIFIC  
PALSONIC  
PANASONIC 20000, 20030,  
20051, 20054,  
ELECTROBAND  
20000  
ELECTROGRAPH  
21755  
ELECTROHOME  
20000, 20030,  
20000, 20017,  
20036, 20047,  
20051, 20054,  
20145, 20178,  
20179, 21145,  
21150, 21245,  
21378  
20264  
MAJESTIC  
MARANTZ  
20017  
20030, 20037,  
20054, 20704,  
21454  
20037  
20036, 20037  
20156, 20161,  
20236, 20250,  
20650, 21168,  
21175, 21177  
20706  
20179  
20150, 20154,  
20178  
20178  
MARK  
MATSUI  
HYUNDAI  
ICE  
20849, 20865  
20264  
EMERALD  
MATSUSHITA 20051, 20161,  
20250, 20650  
PANDA  
PAUSA  
IMA  
20178, 20179,  
20180, 20236  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAXONIC  
PCE  
20030, 20060  
20060, 20156,  
20179  
20000, 20030,  
20036, 20037,  
20047, 20051,  
20060, 20156,  
20161, 20178,  
20250, 21347,  
21378  
20030, 20054,  
20145, 20179,  
20186, 20463  
20030, 20037,  
20054, 20171,  
20186, 20690,  
21254, 21454,  
21455  
20030, 20051,  
20060, 20178  
20166, 20679,  
20866, 21260  
20765, 20865  
SANYO  
20000, 20036,  
20037, 20047,  
20054, 20088,  
20154, 20171,  
20376, 20424,  
20463, 21179,  
21755  
20060  
20178  
20030, 20178,  
20179, 20180,  
20236  
20179, 20178,  
20171, 20166,  
20156, 20154,  
20093, 20060,  
20054, 20053,  
20051, 20047,  
20037, 20036,  
20030, 20017,  
20000  
20036, 20054,  
20093, 20179,  
20180, 20256,  
20787, 21165  
TEAC  
20037, 20154,  
20264, 20706  
20051, 20054,  
20250  
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE  
20179, 20236,  
TECHNICS  
20451, 20463,  
20623, 20889  
PENNEY  
TECHNOL ACE20179  
TECHNOVOX 20030  
TECHWOOD 20051, 20060,  
20250  
WORLD  
XR-1000  
YAMAHA  
20180, 20236,  
20451, 20463  
20154, 20171,  
20179, 20180  
20030, 20650,  
20769, 21405,  
21406, 21407,  
21522  
SAVILLE  
SCOTCH  
SCOTT  
TEKNIKA  
20054, 20060,  
20092, 20150,  
20178, 20179,  
20180, 20186,  
20463  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
SEARS  
YORX  
20030  
TELECOLOR 20017  
TELEFUNKEN 20702  
ZENITH  
20000, 20017,  
20030, 20037,  
20047, 20092,  
20093, 20145,  
20160, 20171,  
20178, 20463,  
20812, 21145,  
21265  
TELETON  
TEVION  
THOMAS  
THOMSON  
TMK  
20186  
20037  
20047, 20178  
20047, 21447  
20178, 20180,  
20236  
PILOT  
PIONEER  
POLAROID  
PORTLAND 20092, 20451  
PRECISION  
PRIMA  
SHARP  
TNCI  
TOCOM  
TOSHIBA  
20017  
20156  
PVR  
21704, 21656,  
21456, 21356,  
21265, 21256,  
21173, 21169,  
21156, 21145,  
20845, 20650,  
20509, 20264,  
20166, 20156,  
20154, 20150,  
20145, 20060,  
20036  
20180, 20236  
20761, 20783,  
20815, 20817  
ABS  
31972  
SHENG CHIA 20093  
SHIVAKI  
SIEMENS  
SIGNATURE 20030, 20047,  
20093, 20179  
SIMPSON  
ALIENWARE 31972  
CYBERPOWER  
31972  
20037, 20178  
20145  
PRINCETON 20700  
PRISM  
PROSCAN  
20051, 20250  
20047, 21347,  
21447  
20037, 20264  
20178  
DELL  
DIRECTV  
GATEWAY  
31972  
30739  
31972  
20030, 20178,  
20186  
20060, 20092  
PROTEC  
PROTON  
PROVISION 20037  
PULSAR  
PULSER  
QUARTZ  
QUASAR  
HEWLETT PACKARD  
31972  
SINGER  
SKY-NORTH 20037  
SOLAR DRAPE  
20000  
HITACHI  
31718  
20017, 20092  
TOTEVISION 20051  
TOYOMENKA 20178  
TRUETONE  
TVS  
HOWARD COMPUTERS  
31972  
20092, 20178  
20150, 20178  
20051, 20250,  
20650  
20037  
20047  
SONY  
20000, 20017,  
20051, 20250  
20463  
20092  
HP  
31972  
20036, 20053,  
20150, 20154,  
21100, 21167,  
21300, 21651  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
30739  
ULTRA  
R-LINE  
RABBIT  
RADIOSHACK 20030, 20047,  
20150, 20154,  
UNIVERSAL 20047  
UNIVERSUM 20036, 20037,  
20170, 20264,  
HUMAX  
HUSH  
30739  
31972  
SOUNDESIGN 20178, 20179,  
20180, 20186  
SPECTRAVISION  
20156, 20178,  
IBUYPOWER 31972  
20474  
20864, 20885,  
21755, 21756  
JVC  
LINKSYS  
31279  
31972  
20178, 20180  
V
RCA  
20000, 20047,  
20051, 20054,  
20090, 20093,  
20178, 20679,  
21047, 21147,  
21247, 21347,  
21447, 21547  
20030, 20047,  
20150, 20154,  
20178, 20180  
20037  
MEDIA CENTER PC  
31972  
MICROSOFT 31972  
20179, 20186  
VECTOR RESEARCH  
20030  
VICTOR  
SQUAREVIEW 20171  
SR2000  
SSS  
STARLITE  
STUDIO EXPERIENCE  
20843  
SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864  
SUPRE-MACY 20186  
SUPREME  
SV2000  
SVA  
20154, 20171  
20180  
20180, 20236  
20036, 20053,  
20160, 20653  
20054  
MIND  
31972  
MITSUBISHI 31714  
NIVEUS MEDIA  
31972  
NORTHGATE 31972  
PANASONIC 30616, 31244,  
31732, 31807,  
VIDIKRON  
VIDTECH  
VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864,  
20885, 21755  
VIKING  
VISIO  
20036, 20178  
REALISTIC  
20060  
REVOX  
RUNCO  
20000  
20054  
20864, 20885,  
21755, 21756  
20864, 20885,  
21756  
20000, 20017,  
20030, 20037,  
20047, 20051,  
20054, 20093,  
20154, 20166,  
20178, 20179,  
20186, 20236,  
20866, 21156  
20156  
31808, 31809  
20017, 20030,  
20060  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
RCA  
30618, 30739  
31803  
30880  
20587, 20748,  
20865, 20870,  
20871  
20000, 20030,  
20036, 20037,  
20047, 20051,  
20054, 20092,  
20154, 20171,  
20178, 20179,  
20186  
VIZIO  
SAMPO  
20030, 20047,  
21755, 21756  
20017, 20030,  
20036, 20037,  
20047, 20054,  
20060, 20154,  
20178, 20264,  
20587, 20702,  
20766, 20812,  
20814, 21060  
20030, 20060  
20030, 20060,  
20463  
WARDS  
REPLAYTV  
SAMSUNG  
SHARP  
30614, 30616  
30739  
31742, 31810  
SAMSUNG  
SYLVANIA  
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616  
SONY  
30636, 31447,  
31448, 31636,  
31972  
STACK 9  
31972  
SYMPHONIC 20000, 20171,  
20178, 20179,  
WAYCON  
WELTON  
WESTINGHOUSE  
20000, 20451,  
20885, 20889  
SYSTEMAX 31972  
TAGAR SYSTEMS  
31972  
SANKY  
SANSUI  
20178  
20180  
20093  
20000, 20037,  
20051, 21756  
TANDY  
TATUNG  
TIVO  
30618, 30636,  
30739  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA  
30828, 31008,  
31739, 31972,  
31996  
31972  
31706  
DIRECTV  
DUAL  
DURABRAND 30039, 30038  
DYNATECH 30240, 30000  
ELECTROHOME  
30060, 30037,  
30739  
30000  
LG  
30037, 30240,  
30038  
30348  
31972  
30240, 30000,  
30038  
ORION  
30184, 30240,  
30000, 30104,  
30121, 30209,  
31479  
LIFETEC  
LINKSYS  
LLOYD'S  
TOUCH  
VICTOR  
VIEWSONIC 31972  
VOODOO  
ZT GROUP  
PANAMA  
PANASONIC 31062, 30035,  
30162, 30000,  
30035  
31972  
31972  
30240, 30000,  
30043, 30209  
LOEWE  
LOGIK  
LXI  
30081  
30240, 30000  
30037, 30000,  
30042, 30067  
30225, 30226,  
30614, 30616,  
31035, 31244,  
31292, 31308,  
31732, 31807,  
31808, 31809  
ELECTROPHONIC  
30037  
EMERALD  
EMEREX  
VCR  
A-MARK  
30184, 30121  
30032  
M ELECTRONIC  
30240  
MAGNASONIC30037, 30240,  
30000, 31278  
MAGNAVOX 30035, 30037,  
30048, 30039,  
30037, 30240,  
30000  
31972  
30060, 30048,  
30039, 30047,  
30104, 30209  
EMERSON  
30037, 30184,  
30240, 30000,  
30121, 30043,  
30209, 30348,  
31278, 31479  
30039, 30047,  
30000, 30104  
30035, 30033  
30045, 30000  
30037, 30000,  
31333  
ABS  
ADMIRAL  
PENNEY  
30035, 30162,  
30037, 30047,  
30081, 30240,  
30000, 30042,  
30067, 30038,  
31035, 31237  
30042  
30035, 30081,  
30000, 30209  
30035, 30162,  
30048, 30081,  
30045, 30000,  
30209, 30034,  
30616, 30618,  
30739, 31381  
30037  
30081, 30240,  
30000, 30226,  
30618, 31781  
30240  
30035, 30081,  
30038, 31381  
30037  
30037, 30209,  
30348  
ADVENTURA 30037, 30240,  
30000  
AIWA  
FISHER  
30037, 30000,  
30307, 30348,  
31284, 31291,  
31332, 31336  
30041  
FUJI  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
MAGNIN  
MARANTZ  
PENTAX  
PHILCO  
MARTA  
MATSUI  
PHILIPS  
AKAI  
ALBA  
GARRARD  
GATEWAY  
GE  
30000  
31972  
30209  
ALIENWARE 31972  
ALLEGRO 30039  
AMERICAN HIGH  
30035, 30081  
30000  
ANAM NATIONAL  
30226  
30060, 30035,  
30048, 30240,  
30000, 30807,  
31035, 31060  
30060  
30045  
30037, 30000  
30240, 30614  
MATSUSHITA 30035, 30162,  
30081, 30226  
MEDIA CENTER PC  
31972  
MEDION  
MEI  
MEMOREX  
PILOT  
PIONEER  
AMSTRAD  
GEMINI  
30348  
30035  
30162, 30081,  
30042, 30067,  
31803  
GENERAL  
GENEXXA  
GO VIDEO  
GOLDSTAR 30035, 30037,  
30039, 30000,  
30035, 30162,  
30037, 30048,  
30039, 30047,  
30240, 30000,  
30104, 30209,  
30307, 30348,  
31237  
30037  
30060, 30240,  
30043  
ASHA  
30240  
POLK AUDIO 30081  
PROFITRONIC  
30240  
PROSCAN  
PROTEC  
PULSAR  
PULSER  
QUARTZ  
QUASAR  
ASTRA  
AUDIOVOX  
AVIS  
BEAUMARK 30240  
BELL & HOWELL  
30035, 30240  
30037, 30038  
30000  
30038, 31237  
30060, 31060  
30000  
GOODMANS 30037, 30081,  
30000  
GRADIENTE 30000  
GRANADA  
GRUNDIG  
30039, 30240  
30240  
30035, 30047  
30035, 30162,  
30226, 31035  
30035, 30048,  
30039, 30000,  
30104  
METZ  
MGA  
30081, 30042  
30081, 30034,  
30226  
BROKSONIC 30184, 30121,  
30209, 30348,  
MGN TECHNOLOGY  
30240  
MICROSOFT 31972  
HARLEY DAVIDSON  
30000  
RADIOSHACK 30035, 30162,  
30037, 30048,  
31479  
CALIX  
30037  
HARMAN/KARDON  
MIDLAND  
MIND  
MINOLTA  
MITSUBISHI 30060, 30048,  
30047, 30000,  
30240  
31972  
30042  
30047, 30240,  
30000, 30104  
30037  
30037  
CANDLE  
CANON  
CARRERA  
CARVER  
CITIZEN  
30037, 30038  
30035, 30034  
30240  
30035, 30081  
30035, 30037,  
30240, 30000,  
30209, 31278  
30037  
30081, 30038  
HEWLETT PACKARD  
31972  
RADIX  
RANDEX  
RCA  
HI-Q  
30035, 30047,  
30060, 30035,  
30048, 30240,  
30045, 30000,  
30042, 30166,  
30807, 30880,  
31035, 31060  
30035, 30162,  
30037, 30048,  
30047, 30240,  
30000, 30104,  
30121  
30000  
30042, 30067,  
30043, 30041,  
30807, 31343,  
31714  
HITACHI  
30035, 30037,  
30045, 30000,  
30042, 30041,  
30166, 31286,  
31326, 31718  
CLASSIC  
COLORTYME 30060, 30035,  
30045  
COLT  
CRAIG  
MOTOROLA 30035, 30048  
MTC  
MTX  
MULTITECH 30039, 30000  
NAD  
NEC  
30240, 30000  
30000  
REALISTIC  
REPLAYTV  
30000  
30037, 30047,  
30240  
HOWARD COMPUTERS  
31972  
HP  
31972  
30240, 30104  
30104, 30067,  
30041, 30038  
30037  
30037  
30034  
CRITERION 30000  
CROSLEY 30035, 30081,  
30000  
CURTIS MATHES  
30060, 30035,  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
30042, 30739  
30614, 30616  
HUMAX  
HUSH  
30739  
31972  
NIKKO  
NIKKODO  
NIKON  
NISHI  
RICAVISION 31972  
RICOH  
RUNCO  
SAMSUNG  
30034  
30039  
30060, 30240,  
30045, 30000,  
30038, 30739,  
31014  
HYTEK  
30047, 30000  
30162, 30240,  
30000, 30041,  
31035  
IBUYPOWER 31972  
30240  
ITT NOKIA  
JANEIL  
JENSEN  
JVC  
30240, 30041  
30240  
30067, 30041  
30067, 30041,  
31279, 31299,  
31329  
NIVEUS MEDIA  
31972  
30240  
NORTHGATE 31972  
CYBERNEX 30240  
NOBLEX  
CYBERPOWER  
DAEWOO  
SAMTRON  
SANKY  
SANSUI  
30240  
31972  
30037, 30045,  
31278  
30037  
31972  
OLYMPUS  
OPTIMUS  
30035, 30162,  
30048, 30039  
30240, 30000,  
30067, 30209,  
30041, 31479  
30047, 30240,  
30000, 30104,  
31330, 31331  
30104, 30226  
31062, 30035,  
30162, 30037,  
30048, 30047,  
30240, 30000,  
30104  
KEC  
30037  
DAYTRON  
DELL  
DENON  
KENWOOD  
30067, 30041,  
30038  
SANYO  
30081, 30042  
30041  
KODAK  
KTV  
30035, 30037  
30000  
DERWENT  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCOTT  
SEARS  
30184, 30045,  
30121, 30043  
30060, 30035,  
30162, 30037,  
30048, 30039,  
30047, 30033,  
30045, 30000,  
30042, 30104,  
30067, 30043,  
30209, 30041,  
30034, 31237  
30048, 30047,  
30032, 30000,  
30807, 31285,  
31742, 31810  
30039, 30240,  
30000  
ULTRA  
UNITECH  
VECTOR  
VECTOR RESEARCH  
30184, 30038  
VICTOR  
30045  
30240  
30045  
CLAIRTONE 40571  
KLH  
40717, 40790,  
41020, 41149  
40533  
40651, 41061  
40627, 40798  
41533  
COBY  
40778, 41086,  
41107  
KLOSS  
KOSS  
LASONIC  
LECSON  
LENOXX  
LG  
CRAIG  
40831  
CREATIVE  
40503, 40539  
30067, 30041,  
31299, 31706  
CURTIS MATHES  
41087  
CYBERHOME 40816, 40874,  
41023, 41024,  
41127  
VIDEO CONCEPTS  
30045  
VIDEOMAGIC 30037  
VIDEOSONIC 30240, 30000  
VIEWSONIC 31972  
VILLAIN  
VOODOO  
WARDS  
40591, 40741,  
40801, 40869,  
41600  
41058, 41158,  
41416, 41440  
40741  
41117, 41129  
CYTRON  
DAEWOO  
40705  
LITEON  
SHARP  
40784, 40705,  
40770, 40869,  
41169, 41172  
40770  
40872  
40770  
40490, 40634,  
41282, 41634  
40778  
40672  
40675, 41270  
40705  
30000  
31972  
LOEWE  
LOGIX  
MAGNASONIC  
40783  
30060, 30035,  
30037, 30048,  
30047, 30081,  
30033, 30240,  
30045, 30000,  
30042, 30043,  
30041, 30038  
DANSAI  
DAYTEK  
DECCA  
DENON  
SHINTOM  
40651, 40675  
MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,  
40646, 40675,  
SHOGUN  
SIEMENS  
SIGNATURE 30060, 30035,  
30037, 30048,  
30240  
30037, 30104  
40821, 41268  
DENVER  
DIGITREX  
DISNEY  
DIVIDO  
DUAL  
MARANTZ  
40503, 40539,  
40675, 41627  
41533  
40651  
40695, 40831,  
41270  
30000  
30037, 30240  
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE  
30000, 30209  
WORLD  
XR-1000  
MCINTOSH  
MEDION  
MEMOREX  
SINGER  
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616  
SONY  
30209  
30035, 30240,  
30000  
30041, 30038  
30037, 30039,  
30033, 30000,  
30209, 30041,  
30034, 31479  
31972  
40675  
30035, 30047,  
30032, 30033,  
30000, 30067,  
30034, 30226,  
30636, 31232,  
31295, 31296,  
31447, 31448,  
31636, 31972  
DURABRAND 41127  
DVD2000 40521  
ELECTROHOME  
41003  
MICROSOFT 40522, 41708  
MINATO  
MINTEK  
MITSUBISHI 41521, 40521,  
41403, 41629  
NAD  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
40752  
40839, 40717  
EMERSON  
40591, 40675,  
40821, 41268  
ENTERPRISE 40591  
40591, 40741  
40770  
40785, 40869,  
41404  
ZT GROUP  
ENTIVO  
ENZER  
ESA  
FIRSTLINE  
FISHER  
FUNAI  
GATEWAY  
GE  
40503, 40539  
40770  
40821, 41268  
40651  
40670  
40675, 41268  
41158  
40522, 40815,  
40717  
NAIKO  
NEC  
SOUNDMASTER  
30000  
STACK 9  
STS  
SV2000  
SVA  
SYLVANIA  
DVD PLAYER  
31972  
30042  
30000  
30000  
30035, 30081,  
30000, 30043,  
31781  
NESA  
NEXXTECH 41402  
NORCENT  
40717  
3D LAB  
ACCURIAN  
ADVENT  
AIWA  
40503, 40539  
41416  
41016  
40641  
40695, 40705,  
40770, 40899  
40672, 40717  
40790  
41003, 40872,  
41107  
40503, 40627,  
40792, 41612,  
41627  
40571  
41695  
40651  
40672  
ONKYO  
AKAI  
GO VIDEO  
40573, 40744,  
40717, 40741,  
40783, 40869,  
41044, 41075,  
41099, 41158,  
41304, 41730  
40741, 40801,  
40869  
SYMPHONIC 30240, 30000  
SYSTEMAX 31972  
TAGAR SYSTEMS  
31972  
TANDY  
TATUNG  
ALBA  
ALCO  
OPTIMUS  
ORION  
ORITRON  
PALSONIC  
PANASONIC 40503, 40490,  
40571, 40703,  
41010, 41011,  
41282, 41362,  
41462, 41490,  
41632, 41641,  
41762  
ALLEGRO  
AMPHION MEDIA WORKS  
40872  
AMW  
APEX DIGITAL  
40869  
30000, 30104  
30048, 30081,  
30000, 30067,  
30041  
30000, 30067,  
30041  
30035, 30162,  
30037, 30000  
30035, 30037,  
30000  
40872  
GOLDSTAR  
40533, 40672,  
40717, 40755,  
40794, 40796,  
40797, 40830,  
41004, 41020,  
41056, 41061,  
41100  
GOODMANS 40790  
GRADIENTE 40490, 40651  
GREENHILL 40717  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
TEKNIKA  
GRUNDIG  
HARMAN/KARDON  
40582, 40702  
40539, 40705  
PHILIPS  
40503, 40539,  
40646, 40675,  
40854, 41260,  
41267, 41354  
HITACHI  
40573, 40664,  
41247, 41664,  
41764  
TELECORDER 30240  
TELEFUNKEN 30041  
THOMAS  
THOMSON  
TIVO  
ARRGO  
41023  
ASPIRE DIGITAL  
41168  
40717, 40790  
PIANODISC 41024  
PIONEER  
30000  
HITEKER  
I-O DATA  
ILO  
40672  
41405  
41348  
40525, 40571,  
30060, 30041  
30618, 30636,  
30739, 31996  
30240, 30000  
30037  
AUDIOVOX  
40631, 40638,  
41475, 41476,  
41571  
41020, 41061,  
41086  
BEL CANTO DESIGN  
41571  
BLAUPUNKT 40717  
BLUE PARADE  
40571  
BLUE SKY  
BRANDT  
BROKSONIC 40695  
BYD:SIGN 40872  
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS  
40490  
CELESTIAL 41020  
CENTREX  
CINEA  
CINEVISION 40876, 40869  
CITIZEN 41003, 41277  
INITIAL  
INSIGNIA  
INTEGRA  
40717  
41268  
40571, 40627,  
41634  
TMK  
TNIX  
TOCOM  
TOSHIBA  
POLAROID  
30240  
POLK AUDIO 40539  
PORTLAND 40770  
PRESIDIAN  
PRIMA  
PROCEED  
PROSCAN  
PROVISION 40778  
QWESTAR 40651  
30240, 30045,  
30000, 30042,  
30043, 30209,  
30041, 30828,  
30845, 31008,  
31145, 31323,  
31739, 31972,  
31996  
40695  
40651  
IRT  
40783  
JBL  
40702  
40675  
41016  
40672  
40522  
JENSEN  
JMB  
JVC  
41016  
40695  
40558, 40623,  
40867, 41164,  
41241, 41275,  
41590, 41592,  
41594  
40672, 41004  
40831  
RADIONETTE 40741  
RADIOSHACK  
40571  
TOTEVISION 30037, 30240  
TOUCH  
TRIX  
31972  
30037  
KAWASAKI  
KENWOOD  
40790  
40490, 40534  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RCA  
40522, 40571,  
40717, 40790,  
40822, 41022,  
41132  
40571  
40752  
40869  
40623  
41004  
40651  
NAKAMICHI 60147, 60373  
LD PLAYER  
CD PLAYER  
NEC  
NIKKO  
NSM  
60043, 60234  
60362, 60625  
60157  
AIWA  
40203  
ADC  
60018  
CARVER  
DENON  
40064  
40059, 40172,  
40241  
ADCOM  
AIWA  
AKAI  
60234  
60157  
60083, 60643,  
61688  
REALISTIC  
REOC  
RIO  
ROTEL  
ROWA  
SABA  
ONKYO  
60868, 61327,  
60101, 61685  
61063, 60000,  
60032, 60087,  
60468  
DISCO VISION  
OPTIMUS  
40023  
ALBA  
60625  
FUNAI  
40203  
ANAM NATIONAL  
60362  
ARCAM 60157  
AUDIO RESEARCH  
60157  
HITACHI  
KENWOOD  
40023  
40236, 40258  
PANASONIC 60029, 60303,  
60388, 60752,  
SAMPO  
SAMSUNG  
40752  
40490, 40573,  
40744, 40820,  
40899, 41044,  
41075, 41599  
40695, 41695  
40670, 40675,  
40695, 41583  
MAGNAVOX 40064, 40217,  
40241  
61682  
PENNEY  
PHILIPS  
60029  
60626, 60157,  
60274  
MARANTZ  
40064  
CAIRN  
60157  
MITSUBISHI 40059, 40241  
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS  
60029, 60303  
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS  
60157  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
NAD  
OPTIMUS  
40059  
40059  
PIONEER  
61063, 61062,  
60032, 61087,  
60468  
PANASONIC 40204  
SCHNEIDER 40783  
SCHWAIGER 40752  
SENSORY SCIENCE  
41158  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
40064  
40059, 40023,  
40241  
40204  
40203  
40023  
40001  
40193, 40201  
40204  
40059  
CARVER  
CCE  
CLASSIC  
CURTIS MATHES  
60032  
DENON  
60157  
60643  
61297  
POLK AUDIO 60157  
PROTON  
QED  
QUAD  
60157  
60157  
60157  
60029  
QUASAR  
REALISTIC  
SEGA  
SHARP  
SONY  
TECHNICS  
TOSHIBA  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
SHARP  
40630, 40675,  
QUASAR  
40752, 41256,  
41556, 41642,  
42002  
60873, 60626,  
60003, 60034,  
60766  
RADIOSHACK 60000, 60032,  
60180, 60468  
RCA  
61062, 60032,  
60053, 60468  
60000, 60032,  
60087, 60180,  
60468  
SHARPER IMAGE  
41117  
SHERWOOD 40770  
DKK  
60000  
DMX ELECTRONICS  
60157  
FISHER  
REALISTIC  
40245  
40059  
SHINSONIC 40533, 40839  
60000, 61325  
SLIM ART  
SONIC BLUE 40573, 40783,  
40869, 41099  
40784  
YAMAHA  
40217  
GEMINI  
GENEXXA  
GOLDSTAR  
GPX  
GRUNDIG  
HARMAN/KARDON  
60100, 60157,  
60625  
60032  
61208  
61296  
60157  
REVOX  
ROKSAN  
ROTEL  
SAE  
SAMSUNG  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SHARP  
60157  
60435  
60157  
60157  
DVD RECORDER  
ACCURIAN  
APEX DIGITAL51056  
ASPIRE DIGITAL  
51168  
COBY  
CYBERHOME 51129  
DENON  
EMERSON  
FUNAI  
SONY  
40533, 41533,  
40864, 40772,  
41033, 41069,  
41070, 41431,  
41633  
51416  
60524  
60000, 60157  
60000, 60087  
60861, 60034,  
60180, 61684  
60083, 61202  
60032  
60157, 60180  
60101  
60003  
60032, 60072,  
61294  
60681, 60826,  
60626, 60000,  
60029, 60028,  
60190, 61683  
61317  
SUPERSCAN 40821  
SVA  
SYLVANIA  
51086  
HITACHI  
INKEL  
INTEGRA  
JERROLD  
JVC  
40717  
40675, 40821,  
41268  
SHERWOOD 61067, 60180  
SHURE 60043  
SONIC FRONTIERS  
60157  
50490  
50675  
50675  
51158  
50741, 51158,  
51304, 51730  
51664, 51764  
51164, 51275  
50741  
SYMPHONIC 40675, 40821,  
41268  
TATUNG  
TEAC  
GATEWAY  
GO VIDEO  
SONY  
60490, 60000,  
40770  
40571, 40717,  
40790  
40490, 40703  
40770  
40651  
KENWOOD  
60100, 61364,  
60185, 61790  
60018  
60157  
60157  
HITACHI  
JVC  
LG  
STS  
SUGDEN  
SYLVANIA  
SYMPHONIC 60180  
TAG MCLAREN  
60157  
TANDY  
TDK  
TECHNICS  
TECHNIKA  
TEVION  
THETA DIGITAL  
40571  
KOSS  
LITEON  
51158, 51416,  
51440  
KRELL  
KYOCERA  
LG  
LINN  
LUXMAN  
MAGNAVOX 60157, 60038,  
60274  
MARANTZ  
60157  
60018  
61208  
60157  
MAGNAVOX 50646, 50675  
MITSUBISHI 51629  
PANASONIC 50490, 51010,  
51011  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
40522  
60032  
61208  
60490, 60180,  
60362  
60029, 60303  
40503, 40573,  
40539, 40695,  
41045, 41154,  
41510, 41595,  
41639  
60328, 60489  
TEAC  
50646  
50631, 51475,  
51476  
51086  
50522  
60626, 60029,  
60157, 60038,  
60180, 60373,  
60435  
TECHNICS  
TECHWOOD 60303, 60362  
THULE AUDIO60157  
TOSHIBA  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
UNIMAX  
UNIVERSUM 40591  
URBAN CONCEPTS  
40770  
POLAROID  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SENSORY SCIENCE  
51158  
SHARP  
61693, 61694  
60072  
50490  
MATSUI  
MCS  
MEMOREX  
60157  
40503, 40539  
40839  
VENTURER 40790  
60029, 60043  
60000, 60032,  
60468  
60032, 60157,  
60053, 60087  
60490, 60868,  
60888, 60036,  
61292, 62000,  
62001  
US LOGIC  
50630, 50675,  
51556, 51642,  
52002  
51033, 51069,  
51070, 51431  
50675  
51510, 51639  
51275  
YAMAHA  
VICTOR  
WYSE  
XBOX  
41241, 41597  
41652  
40522, 41708  
40490, 40539,  
40545, 41282,  
42000, 42001  
MGA  
MICROMEGA 60157  
MIRO  
MISSION  
MITSUBISHI 60083, 60808  
MODULAIRE 60000, 60032,  
60087, 60180,  
60083  
SONY  
60000  
60157  
YAMAHA  
YBA  
YORX  
60625  
60000  
SYLVANIA  
TOSHIBA  
VICTOR  
YAMAKAWA 40872  
ZENITH  
40503, 40591,  
40741, 40869  
40784  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
52001  
50741  
60468  
60625  
MTC  
ZEUS  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIOVOX  
BOSE  
CAPETRONIC 80531  
CARVER  
CURTIS MATHES  
81390  
81229, 81933  
RADIOSHACK  
RCA  
CD RECORDER  
81609  
CLASSIC  
DENON  
FISHER  
GPX  
71297  
70626  
71325  
71296  
81023, 81609,  
81254, 80080,  
80531, 81074,  
81390, 81511  
81609, 80158,  
80121, 80186  
81189, 80148,  
81764  
80219  
80186, 80262  
80281  
81058, 81441,  
81258, 81759,  
81622, 80158,  
81406, 81558,  
81658, 81758,  
81858  
81189, 80121  
80014, 80080  
HARMAN/KARDON  
71202  
DELPHI  
DENON  
81414, 81846  
81360, 80121,  
80386, 81142  
80531  
80219  
80281  
REALISTIC  
SANSUI  
JVC  
71294  
KENWOOD  
LG  
70626  
71208  
EMERSON  
FISHER  
GARRARD  
GOLDSTAR 80281  
GRUNDIG 80281  
HARMAN/KARDON  
80110  
SANYO  
SHARP  
SONIC  
SONY  
MARANTZ  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
RCA  
70626  
70626  
71062, 71087  
70053  
SONY  
70000, 70100,  
71364  
HITACHI  
INTEGRA  
80386  
TDK  
71208  
80135, 80842,  
81298, 81320  
80110  
81058, 80074,  
80262, 80464,  
81374, 81495,  
81665  
81390  
80027, 80186,  
80262  
YAMAHA  
70888, 71292  
JBL  
JVC  
STEREOPHONICS  
81023  
TEAC  
MD RECORDER  
81074, 81390  
81308, 81518,  
80039, 81384,  
81633, 81675  
DENON  
70873  
TECHNICS  
KENWOOD  
70681, 70826,  
71683  
KAWASAKI  
KENWOOD  
ONKYO  
OPTIMUS  
70868, 71685  
71063  
TECHWOOD 80281  
THORENS  
TOSHIBA  
81189  
80080, 80135,  
80842  
PANASONIC 71682  
KLH  
LG  
81390  
80281  
PIONEER  
SHARP  
71063  
70861, 71684  
MAGNAVOX 81189, 81269,  
80531, 81266  
MARANTZ  
VENTURER 81390  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
SHERWOOD 71067  
80074  
80158, 80014,  
80080  
81406, 81414,  
81846  
SONY  
70490, 71790  
81189, 81269,  
80039, 81671  
80039  
YAMAHA  
70490, 70888,  
72001  
MCS  
MICROMEGA  
XM  
81189  
81189  
YAMAHA  
81023, 80176,  
80186, 80376,  
81176, 81276,  
81331, 81375,  
82004  
TAPE DECK  
MYRYAD  
ONKYO  
AIWA  
70197  
80135, 80380,  
80842, 81298,  
81320, 81677  
81023, 80158,  
80074, 80014,  
80080, 80121,  
80186, 80219,  
80531, 81074  
DENON  
70076, 70371,  
70412  
GARRARD  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
70308, 70309  
70244, 70273  
70070, 70205,  
70365  
OPTIMUS  
(TUNER ID1) 82005  
(TUNER ID2) 81949  
(XM ID1)  
(XM ID2)  
ZENITH  
82006  
82007  
80281  
NIKKO  
70365  
ONKYO  
OPTIMUS  
PANASONIC 70229  
PIONEER  
RCA  
SHARP  
70135, 70282  
70027  
PANASONIC 81308, 81518,  
80039, 80367,  
OTHER AUDIO  
ACCESSORIES  
81275, 81288,  
81316, 81548,  
81633, 81675,  
81763, 81764  
70027, 70099  
70027  
70205, 70371,  
70412  
70243, 70170,  
70291  
YAMAHA  
82001, 82002  
(iPod)  
82000  
PENNEY  
PHILIPS  
80039  
81189, 81269,  
81266  
SONY  
TEAC  
70308, 70309,  
70365  
70229  
PIONEER  
81023, 80014,  
80080, 80150,  
80281, 80531,  
80630, 81284,  
81384, 81678  
TECHNICS  
TECHNOVOX 70229  
TECHWOOD 70365  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
YAMAHA  
70273  
70027  
70097, 70205,  
70524  
POLK AUDIO 81414  
PROSCAN  
QUASAR  
81254  
80039  
TUNER  
ADC  
80531  
AIWA  
81405, 80158,  
80121, 81388,  
81641  
ALCO  
81390  
ANAM  
ARCAM  
81609, 81074  
81189  
AUDIO PRO 80148  
AUDIOTRONIC  
81189  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2007  
All rights reserved.  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.  
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND  
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN  
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA  
Printed in Malaysia  
WK01930  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
HTR-6080/HTR-6060  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
VOLUME  
EDIT  
SEARCH MODE  
PRESET/TUNING  
CATEGORY  
A/B/C/D/E  
DISPLAY  
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L  
SPEAKERS  
FM/AM  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
SCENE  
h
MEMORY  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
2
3
4
1
PROGRAM  
INPUT  
VIDEO AUX  
PHONES  
TONE CONTROL  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
PURE DIRECT  
AUDIO SELECT  
OPTIMIZER MIC  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SILENT CINEMA  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
OPTICAL  
A
B
C
D E F  
G
H
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
U
V
W
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
G
H
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
POWER  
STANDBY  
AV  
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL  
MD  
CD  
CD-R  
I
CBL  
DTV  
DVD  
TUNER  
VCR  
XM  
A
DOCK  
V-AUX  
PHONO  
DVR  
J
K
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV  
P
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
L
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
STEREO ENHANCER STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT  
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
B
C
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SUR. DECODE  
NIGHT  
SLEEP  
9
0
ENT  
9
0
10  
M
N
PRESET/CH  
SET MENU  
MENU  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
Q
R
S
T
BAND  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
D
E
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
O
XM MEMORY  
REC  
SCENE  
F
1
2
3
4
Printed in Malaysia  
a
WK14560  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
HTR-6060  
Page 35 (footnote *2)  
Incorrect  
*2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this  
unit. When the SCENE mode is deactivated and your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock, this unit selects  
“DOCK” as the input source automatically.  
Correct  
*2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this  
unit.  
Printed in Malaysia  
WK56050  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UC  
HTR-6060  
English/Français  
Page 10 - Illustration  
Incorrect  
Correct  
Printed in Malaysia  
WK59210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Weed Eater Trimmer 530088776 User Manual
Weider Home Gym 831153931 User Manual
West Bend Kitchen Grill Sandwich Maker User Manual
West Bend Popcorn Poppers L5787 User Manual
Whirlpool Range W10665256D User Manual
Woodstock Riding Toy D3244 User Manual
Xerox Printer IPS User Manual
Zanussi Refrigerator 102287 User Manual
Zanussi Washer FLA 801 W User Manual
Zetex Semiconductors PLC Power Supply ZXLD1615 1601 User Manual